Escape 2016 Manual

2016 ESCAPE Owner’s Manual
2016 ESCAPE Owner’s Manual

owner.ford.com ford.ca
November 2015
Second Printing
Owner’s Manual
Escape
Litho in U.S.A.
GJ5J 19A321 AA
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.

Part Number: 20151016184941
Table of Contents
Introduction Driver and Passenger Airbags...................36

About This Manual...........................................7 Front Passenger Sensing System.............37
Symbols Glossary.............................................7 Side Airbags.....................................................39
Data Recording..................................................9 Driver Knee Airbag.........................................40
California Proposition 65..............................11 Safety Canopy™............................................40
Perchlorate.........................................................11 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........42
Ford Credit..........................................................11 Airbag Disposal...............................................43
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................11 Keys and Remote Controls
Special Notices................................................12 Principle of Operation..................................44
Mobile Communications General Information on Radio
Equipment.....................................................13 Frequencies..................................................44
Export Unique Options..................................13 Remote Control..............................................45
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Environment Control...........................................................48
Protecting the Environment........................14
MyKey™
Child Safety Principle of Operation..................................49
General Information.......................................15 Creating a MyKey...........................................50
Installing Child Restraints............................16 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................50
Booster Seats..................................................22 Checking MyKey System Status...............52
Child Restraint Positioning.........................24 Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................53
Child Safety Locks..........................................25
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................53
Seatbelts
Locks
Principle of Operation...................................27
Locking and Unlocking.................................55
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................28
Manual Liftgate..............................................59
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.......................31
Power Liftgate................................................60
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................31 Keyless Entry....................................................62
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................32
Child Restraint and Seatbelt Security
Maintenance................................................33 Passive Anti-Theft System........................65
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................66
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..........................34 Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................67
Supplementary Restraints Audio Control...................................................67
System Voice Control...................................................68
Principle of Operation..................................35 Cruise Control.................................................68
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Table of Contents
Information Display Control......................69 Automatic Climate Control.......................101

Heated Steering Wheel...............................69 Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................102
Wipers and Washers Heated Windows and Mirrors..................105
Windshield Wipers.........................................70 Cabin Air Filter...............................................106
Autowipers........................................................70 Remote Start.................................................106
Windshield Washers.......................................71
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........72 Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position..................107
Lighting Head Restraints.............................................107
Lighting Control...............................................73 Manual Seats.................................................109
Autolamps.........................................................73 Power Seats....................................................110
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................74 Memory Function...........................................112
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................74 Rear Seats........................................................113
Daytime Running Lamps.............................75 Heated Seats...................................................113
Front Fog Lamps.............................................75 Rear Seat Armrest.........................................114
Direction Indicators........................................76
Interior Lamps.................................................76 Universal Garage Door
Ambient Lighting............................................76
Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener................115
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows...............................................77
Auxiliary Power Points
Exterior Mirrors................................................78 Auxiliary Power Points................................120
Interior Mirror...................................................80
Storage Compartments
Sun Visors.........................................................80
Center Console..............................................122
Moonroof..........................................................80
Overhead Console........................................122
Instrument Cluster
Starting and Stopping the
Gauges...............................................................82
Engine
Warning Lamps and Indicators................84
General Information....................................123
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............86
Ignition Switch...............................................123
Keyless Starting.............................................123
Information Displays
Starting a Gasoline Engine........................124
General Information......................................87
Engine Block Heater.....................................127
Trip Computer.................................................90
Information Messages.................................90
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions.......................................129
Climate Control
Fuel Quality....................................................130
Manual Climate Control............................100
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................130

Table of Contents
Running Out of Fuel....................................130 Cross Traffic Alert.........................................163

Refueling...........................................................131 Eco Mode........................................................166
Fuel Consumption........................................133 Steering............................................................167
Emission Control System..........................134
Load Carrying
Transmission Rear Under Floor Storage.........................169
Automatic Transmission............................137 Luggage Covers.............................................169
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................170
Four-Wheel Drive Load Limit.........................................................171
Principle of Operation................................140
Using Four-Wheel Drive............................140 Towing
Towing a Trailer..............................................178
Brakes Trailer Sway Control.....................................179
General Information....................................145 Recommended Towing Weights.............179
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Essential Towing Checks............................181
Brakes...........................................................145 Towing Points................................................184
Parking Brake.................................................146 Transporting the Vehicle...........................185
Hill Start Assist..............................................146 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......185
Traction Control Driving Hints

Principle of Operation................................148 Breaking-In......................................................187
Using Traction Control...............................148 Economical Driving......................................187
Driving Through Water...............................188
Stability Control Floor Mats.......................................................188
Principle of Operation................................149
Using Stability Control...............................150 Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance..................................190
Parking Aids Hazard Warning Flashers...........................191
Principle of Operation..................................151 Fuel Shutoff.....................................................191
Rear Parking Aid.............................................151 Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................192
Front Parking Aid..........................................152 Post-Crash Alert System...........................194
Active Park Assist.........................................153
Rear View Camera........................................157 Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need...............195
Cruise Control In California (U.S. Only).............................196
Principle of Operation................................160 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Using Cruise Control...................................160 Line Program (U.S. Only).......................197
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Driving Aids Program (Canada Only)........................198
Blind Spot Information System...............161

Table of Contents
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Vehicle Care

Canada........................................................198
General Information...................................235
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................199 Cleaning Products.......................................235
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Cleaning the Exterior..................................235
Only)............................................................200 Waxing.............................................................236
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Cleaning the Engine....................................237
Only)............................................................200 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................237
Fuses Cleaning the Interior...................................238
Fuse Specification Chart..........................202 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Changing a Fuse.............................................211 Instrument Cluster Lens.......................238
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................239
Maintenance Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............239
General Information....................................213 Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................239
Opening and Closing the Hood...............213 Vehicle Storage............................................240
Under Hood Overview - 1.6L
EcoBoost™.................................................215 Wheels and Tires
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L General Information...................................242
EcoBoost™.................................................216 Tire Care..........................................................245
Under Hood Overview - 2.5L.....................217 Using Snow Chains.....................................258
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........259
EcoBoost™.................................................218
Changing a Road Wheel...........................262
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost™/
2.5L................................................................218 Technical Specifications..........................266
Engine Oil Check...........................................218
Engine Coolant Check................................219 Capacities and Specific-
Automatic Transmission Fluid
ations
Check............................................................222 Engine Specifications - 1.6L
Brake Fluid Check........................................222 EcoBoost™...............................................268
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................222 Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™...............................................268
Washer Fluid Check.....................................222
Engine Specifications - 2.5L....................269
Fuel Filter.........................................................222
Motorcraft Parts - 1.6L EcoBoost™......270
Changing the 12V Battery.........................223
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™......271
Checking the Wiper Blades......................224
Motorcraft Parts - 2.5L...............................272
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................224
Vehicle Identification Number................273
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................225
Vehicle Certification Label.......................274
Removing a Headlamp..............................227
Transmission Code Designation............274
Changing a Bulb...........................................227
Capacities and Specifications - 1.6L
Bulb Specification Chart............................231 EcoBoost™................................................275
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................233 Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™................................................278

Table of Contents
Capacities and Specifications - 2.5L....282 Appendices

End User License Agreement.................363
Audio System
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
CD..................................................................287
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC............................................................289
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio.............................291
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD.........................................................293
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/
CD..................................................................295
Digital Radio..................................................296
Satellite Radio..............................................298
USB Port..........................................................301
Media Hub.......................................................301
SYNC™
Using Voice Recognition...........................304
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........306
SYNC™ Applications and Services.......318
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................323
SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................332
Accessories
Accessories....................................................340
Extended Service Plan

(ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................342
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information.......344
Normal Scheduled Maintenance...........347
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................350
Scheduled Maintenance Record............352

6

Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and E154903
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any A Right-hand side.
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe B Left-hand side.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable These are some of the symbols you may
local laws that may affect the use of see on your vehicle.
electronic devices while driving. Safety alert
Note: This manual describes product

features and options available throughout See Owner's Manual
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the Air conditioning system
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this E162384
manual may show features as used in Anti-lock braking system

different models, so they may appear
different to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling Battery
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
Battery acid
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat. Brake fluid - non petroleum
based

Introduction
Brake system Front airbag
Cabin air filter Front fog lamps
Check fuel cap Fuel pump reset
Child safety door lock or unlock Fuse compartment
Child seat lower anchor Hazard warning flashers
Child seat tether anchor Heated rear window
Cruise control Heated windshield
E71340
Do not open when hot Interior luggage compartment

release
Engine air filter Jack
Engine coolant Keep out of reach of children

E161353
Engine coolant temperature Lighting control
Engine oil Low tire pressure warning
Explosive gas Maintain correct fluid level
Fan warning Note operating instructions
Fasten seatbelt Panic alarm

Introduction
Parking aid facilities may access or share among them

vehicle diagnostic information received
E139213 through a direct connection to your vehicle
Parking brake when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
Power steering fluid
facilities may access or share among them
data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose
Power windows front/rear to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,
you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
Power window lockout electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used
Service engine soon for any purpose. See SYNC™ (page 302).
Event Data Recording

Side airbag This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
Shield the eyes certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
Stability control this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
E138639 The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
Windshield wash and wipe
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
DATA RECORDING
• How various systems in your vehicle
Service Data Recording were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
Service data recorders in your vehicle are passenger safety belts were
capable of collecting and storing buckled/fastened;
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
• How far (if at all) the driver was
This potentially includes information about
depressing the accelerator and/or
the performance or status of various
the brake pedal; and
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake • How fast the vehicle was traveling;
systems. In order to properly diagnose and and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company, • Where the driver was positioning
Ford of Canada, and service and repair the steering wheel.

Introduction
This data can help provide a better Note: Including to the extent that any
understanding of the circumstances in law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
which crashes and injuries occur. applies to SYNC or its features, please
Note: Event data recorder data is note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
recorded by your vehicle only if a equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data may, through any paired and connected
is recorded by the event data recorder cell phone, disclose to emergency
under normal driving conditions and no services that the vehicle has been in a
personal data or information (e.g., name, crash involving the deployment of an
gender, age, and crash location) is airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
recorded (see limitations regarding 911 activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Assist and Traffic, directions and Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
Information privacy below). However, may also be capable of being used to
parties, such as law enforcement, could electronically or verbally provide to 911
combine the event data recorder data operators the vehicle location (such as
with the type of personally identifying latitude and longitude), and/or other
data routinely acquired during a crash details about the vehicle or crash or
investigation. personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
To read data recorded by an event data provide the most appropriate emergency
recorder, special equipment is required, services. If you do not want to disclose
and access to the vehicle or the event this information, do not activate the 911
data recorder is needed. In addition to Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 302).
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that Additionally, when you connect to
have such special equipment, can read Traffic, Directions and Information (if
the information if they have access to equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
the vehicle or the event data recorder. GPS technology and advanced vehicle
Ford Motor Company and Ford of sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
Canada do not access event data location, travel direction, and speed
recorder information without obtaining (“vehicle travel information”), only to
consent, unless pursuant to court order help provide you with the directions,
or where required by law enforcement, traffic reports, or business searches
other government authorities or other that you request. If you do not want
third parties acting with lawful Ford or its vendors to receive this
authority. Other parties may seek to information, do not activate the
access the information independently service. For more information, see
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Traffic, Directions and Information,
Canada. Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 302).
10

Introduction
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 For your convenience we offer a number

of ways to contact us, as well as to help
WARNINGS manage your account.
Some constituents of engine Phone: 1-800-727-7000
exhaust, certain vehicle components, For more information regarding Ford Credit,
certain fluids contained in vehicles as well as to access Account Manager,
and certain products of component wear please go to www.fordcredit.com.
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. REPLACEMENT PARTS
Battery posts, terminals and related RECOMMENDATION
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the Your vehicle has been built to the highest
State of California to cause cancer and standards using quality parts. We
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain recommend that you demand the use of
other chemicals known to the State of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
California to cause cancer. Wash your whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
hands after handling. maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
PERCHLORATE Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, safety belt Scheduled Maintenance and
pretensioners and remote control batteries Mechanical Repairs
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle One of the best ways for you to make sure
end of life disposal. that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
For more information visit: recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
Web Address this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ specifications.
perchlorate
Collision Repairs
FORD CREDIT We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
(U.S. Only) Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish,
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing structural integrity, corrosion protection
and lease plans to help you acquire your and dent resistance. During vehicle
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
11

Introduction
development we validate these parts On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)

deliver the intended level of protection as
a whole system. A great way to know for Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics
sure you are getting this level of protection (OBD-II) system has a data port for
is to use genuine Ford replacement diagnostics, repair and reprogramming
collision parts. services with diagnostic scan tools.
Installing a non-Ford-approved
Warranty on Replacement Parts aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement remote insurance company monitoring,
parts are the only replacement parts that remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage engine reprogramming, may cause
caused to your vehicle as a result of the interference or damage to vehicle systems.
failure of non-Ford parts may not be We do not recommend or endorse the use
covered by the Ford Warranty. For of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket
additional information, refer to the terms OBD plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty
and conditions of the Ford Warranty. may not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
SPECIAL NOTICES plug-in device.
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks

New Vehicle Limited Warranty and Utility Type Vehicles
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your WARNING
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, Utility vehicles have a significantly
refer to the Warranty Manual that is higher rollover rate than other types
provided to you along with your Owner’s of vehicles.
Manual.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
Special Instructions
this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted is not a passenger car. As with other
with sophisticated electronic controls. vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
WARNINGS vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
You risk death or serious injury to injury or death.
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by Using Your Vehicle With a
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the Snowplow
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury. Do not use this vehicle for
snowplowing.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
Your vehicle is not equipped with a
or infant seats should NEVER be
snowplowing package.
placed in front of an active
passenger airbag.
12

Introduction
Using Your Vehicle as an EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS

Ambulance
For your particular global region, your
Do not use this vehicle as an
vehicle may be equipped with features and
ambulance.
options that are different from the features
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford and options that are described in this
Ambulance Preparation Package. Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS market unique supplement, if provided,
EQUIPMENT you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
Using mobile communications equipment are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
is becoming increasingly important in the Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
conduct of business and personal affairs. Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
However, you must not compromise your listed as standard may be different on units
own or others’ safety when using such built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s
equipment. Mobile communications can Manual for all other required
enhance personal safety and security when information and warnings.
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
loss of vehicle control, crash and
you use extreme caution when using any
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
while driving and encourage the use of
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
13

Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
14

Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS

consult your pediatrician to make sure your
See the following sections for directions child seat is appropriate for your child, and
on how to properly use safety restraints is compatible with and properly installed
for children. in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free
WARNINGS
at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
Always make sure your child is http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
secured properly in a device that is contact Transport Canada toll free at
appropriate for their height, age and 1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
weight. Child safety restraints must be find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
bought separately from your vehicle. Failure to properly restrain children in
Failure to follow these instructions and safety seats made especially for their
guidelines may result in an increased risk height, age, and weight may result in an
of serious injury or death to your child. increased risk of serious injury or death to
All children are shaped differently. your child.
The recommendations for safety Do not leave children or animals
restraints are based on probable unattended in the vehicle. On hot
child height, age and weight thresholds days, the temperature in the trunk or
from the National Highway Traffic Safety vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Administration and other safety Exposure of people or animals to these
organizations, or are the minimum high temperatures for even a short time
requirements of law. We recommend can cause death or serious heat-related
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child injuries, including brain damage. Small
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and children are particularly at risk.
15

Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child Child size, height, weight, or age Recommended restraint

type
Use a child safety seat

Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (sometimes called an
toddlers (generally age four or younger). infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four Use a belt-positioning
Small children
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb booster seat.
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a vehicle safety belt
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster having the lap belt snug
seat (generally children who are at least and low across the hips,
Larger children 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 shoulder belt centered
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom- across the shoulder and
mended by child restraint manufacturer). chest, and seat back
upright.
• You are required by law to properly use

safety seats for infants and toddlers in INSTALLING CHILD
the United States and Canada. RESTRAINTS
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster Child Seats
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about
the safety of children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See E142594
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 37).
16

Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called • Place the vehicle seat upon which the
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or child seat will be installed in the upright
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or position.
children weighing 40 pounds (18 • Put the safety belt in the automatic
kilograms) or less (generally age four or locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
younger). does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
Perform the following steps when
WARNINGS installing the child seat with combination
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a lap and shoulder belts:
child seat. Never place a rear-facing Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
child seat in front of an active airbag. a forward facing child seat, the steps are
If you must use a forward-facing child seat the same for installing a rear facing child
in the front seat, move the seat upon which seat.
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
E142528
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained. 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
When installing a child safety seat with belt.
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for
that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling. E142529
17

Child Safety
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and

then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic

locking mode, grasp the shoulder
E142530 portion of the belt and pull downward
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt until all of the belt is pulled out.
portions together, route the tongue Note: The automatic locking mode is
through the child seat according to the available on the front passenger and rear
child seat manufacturer's instructions. seats.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142533
18

Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
Force the seat down with extra weight, for CHildren (LATCH)
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while WARNINGS
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order Never attach two child safety seats
to force slack from the belt. This is to the same anchor. In a crash, one
necessary to remove the remaining anchor may not be strong enough to
slack that will exist once the extra hold two child safety seat attachments
weight of the child is added to the child and may break, causing serious injury or
restraint. It also helps to achieve the death.
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean Depending on where you secure a
toward the buckle will additionally help child restraint, and depending on the
to remove remaining slack from the child restraint design, you may block
belt. access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat rendering those features potentially
is equipped). unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three

vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where seat back and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
E142534 attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
10. Before placing the child in the seat, positions in your vehicle. This type of
forcibly move the seat forward and attachment method eliminates the need
back to make sure the seat is securely to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
held in place. To check this, grab the however the safety belt can still be used
seat at the belt path and attempt to to attach the child seat. For forward-facing
move it side to side and forward and child seats, the top tether strap must also
back. There should be no more than be attached to the proper top tether
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement anchor, if a top tether strap has been
for proper installation. provided with your child seat.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
19

Child Safety
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the

Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not
use LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit and
E142535 specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating The lower anchors at the center of the
positions marked with the child seat second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches
symbol. (46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with
rigid LATCH attachments cannot be
installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with
attachments on belt webbing) can only be
used at this seating position provided that
the child seat manufacturer's instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached
to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
E144054
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
section of the rear seat between the side and forward and back where it is
cushion and seat back below the symbols secured to your vehicle. The seat should
as shown. Follow the child seat move less than one inch when you do this
manufacturer's instructions to properly for a proper installation.
install a child seat with LATCH
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
attachments. Follow the instructions on
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
attaching child safety seats with tether
greatly increases.
straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.
20

Child Safety
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Perform the following steps to install a
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child child safety seat with tether anchors:
Safety Seats Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
When used in combination, either the LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
may be attached first, provided a proper your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
installation is achieved. Attach the tether seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
strap afterward, if included with the child without lifting the front of the child seat.
seat. Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
Using Tether Straps severe crash.
Many forward-facing child safety 1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
seats include a tether strap over the back of the seat. For outboard
which extends from the back of seating positions, route the tether strap
the child safety seat and hooks to an under the head restraint and between
anchoring point called the top tether the head restraint posts. For the center
anchor. Tether straps are available as an seating positions, route the tether strap
accessory for many older safety seats. over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, the head restraints can also
Contact the manufacturer of your child be removed.
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view): E142538
2. Locate the correct anchor on the back

panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are
labeled with the tether strap symbol
and are partially covered by the gap
panel. Pull the panel back to fully
expose the anchors.
E142537
21

Child Safety
recommended by your child restraint

manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142539
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as

shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint
system is equipped with a tether strap,
and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, We also
recommend its use. E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back

BOOSTER SEATS against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
WARNING the seat cushion?
Never place, or allow a child to place, • Can the child sit without slouching?
the shoulder belt under a child's arm • Does the lap belt rest low across the
or behind the back because it hips?
reduces the protection for the upper part • Is the shoulder belt centered on the
of the body and may increase the risk of shoulder and chest?
injury or death in a crash.
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer Always use booster seats in conjunction
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
22

Child Safety
Types of Booster Seats
E70710
E68924 • High back booster seats

• Backless booster seats If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
If your backless booster seat has a supports your child's head, a high back
removable shield, remove the shield. If a booster seat would be a better choice.
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless Children and booster seats vary in size and
booster seat may place your child's head shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
(as measured at the tops of the ears) lap belt low and snug across the hips,
above the top of the seat. In this case, never up across the stomach, and lets you
move the backless booster to another adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
seating position with a higher seat back or and rest snugly near the center of the
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, shoulder. The following drawings compare
or consider using a high back booster seat. the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
23

Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle WARNINGS

seat upon which it is being used, placing a provided for installation and use in
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet conjunction with the instructions and
liner under the booster seat may improve warnings provided by your vehicle
this condition. Do not introduce any item manufacturer. A safety seat that is
thicker than this under the booster seat. improperly installed or utilized, is
Check with the booster seat inappropriate for your child's height, age,
manufacturer's instructions. or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
CHILD RESTRAINT
Never let a passenger hold a child on
POSITIONING his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
WARNINGS protect the child from injury in a crash,
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a which may result in serious injury or death.
child seat. Never place a rear-facing Never use pillows, books, or towels
child seat in front of an active airbag.
to boost a child. They can slide
If you must use a forward-facing child seat around and increase the likelihood
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat of injury or death in a crash.
upon which the child seat is installed all
the way back. When possible, all children Always restrain an unoccupied child
age 12 and under should be properly seat or booster seat. These objects
restrained in a rear seating position. If all may become projectiles in a crash or
children cannot be seated and restrained sudden stop, which may increase the risk
properly in a rear seating position, properly of serious injury.
restrain the largest child in the front seat. Never place, or allow a child to place,
Always carefully follow the the shoulder belt under a child's arm
instructions and warnings provided or behind the back because it
by the manufacturer of any child reduces the protection for the upper part
restraint to determine if the restraint device of the body and may increase the risk of
is appropriate for your child's size, height, injury or death in a crash.
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
24

Child Safety
WARNINGS WARNINGS
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children

Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
LATCH LATCH Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt

Combined (lower (lower and top and LATCH only
Restraint weight of anchors anchors tether (lower
Type child and and top only) anchor anchors
child seat tether and top
anchor) tether
anchor)
Rear facing Up to 65 lb
X X
child seat (29.5 kg)
Rear facing Over 65 lb
X
child seat (29.5 kg)
Forward
Up to 65 lb
facing X X X
(29.5 kg)
child seat
Forward
Over 65 lb
facing X X
(29.5 kg)
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly

against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
107).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
25

Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the

rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
26

Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS

Safety belts and seats can become
WARNINGS hot in a vehicle that has been closed
Always drive and ride with your up in sunny weather; they could burn
seatback upright and the lap belt a small child. Check seat covers and
snug and low across the hips. buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be Front and rear seat occupants,
properly restrained. including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
Never let a passenger hold a child on protection in an accident.
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash. All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
All occupants of your vehicle, occupants of the vehicle should always
including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when
properly wear their safety belts, even an airbag supplemental restraint system
when an airbag supplemental restraint is provided.
system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
• lap and shoulder safety belts
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in • shoulder safety belt with automatic
these areas are more likely to be seriously locking mode, (except driver safety
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride belt)
in any area of your vehicle that is not • height adjuster at the front outboard
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be seating positions
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
• retractor and anchor pretensioner at
and using a safety belt properly.
the front outboard seating positions
In a rollover crash, an unbelted • belt tension sensor at the front
person is significantly more likely to outboard passenger seating position
die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly • safety belt warning light and chime
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never • crash sensors and monitoring system
swing the safety belt around your neck over with readiness indicator.
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
27

Seatbelts
The safety belt pretensioners are designed

to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers. The safety belt
pretensioners on the retractor and anchor
at the front seating positions are designed
to tighten the safety belts firmly against
the occupant's body when activated. This
helps increase the effectiveness of the
safety belts. In frontal crashes, the safety
belt pretensioners can be activated alone
or, if the crash is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags.
E142588
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS 2. To unfasten, press the release button

and remove the tongue from the
The front outboard and rear safety buckle.
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142589
When in use, the rear safety belts should

E142587 be placed in the belt guides on the
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper outboard seatbacks.
buckle (the buckle closest to the Using Safety Belts During
direction the tongue is coming from)
Pregnancy
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure the tongue is securely WARNING
fastened in the buckle.
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the safety belt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should
be positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
See the following figure.
28

Seatbelts
All safety restraints in the vehicle are

combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the first type of
locking mode, and the front outboard
passenger and rear seat safety belts have
both types of locking modes described as
follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode

This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
E142590 adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
Pregnant women should always wear their For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
combination lap and shoulder belt should receives an impact of about 5 mph
be positioned low across the hips below (8 km/h) or more, the combination safety
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will belts will lock to help reduce forward
allow. The shoulder belt should be movement of the driver and passengers.
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest. In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If
Safety Belt Locking Modes this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and
pull webbing out again in a slow and
WARNINGS controlled manner.
After any vehicle crash, the safety
Automatic Locking Mode
belt system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an In this mode, the shoulder belt is
authorized dealer to verify that the automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
automatic locking retractor feature for retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
child seats is still functioning properly. In belt. The automatic locking mode is not
addition, all safety belts should be checked available on the driver safety belt.
for proper function.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY
Mode
MUST BE REPLACED if the safety
belt assembly automatic locking This mode should be used any time a child
retractor feature or any other safety belt safety seat, except a booster, is installed
function is not operating properly when in passenger front or rear seating positions.
checked by an authorized dealer. Failure Children 12 years old and under should be
to replace the belt and retractor assembly properly restrained in a rear seating
could increase the risk of injury in crashes. position whenever possible. See Child
Safety (page 15).
29

Seatbelts
How to Use the Automatic Locking 3. Return the seatback to its desired
Mode upright position.
For vehicles with rear seats that do not
recline or are locked with the seat in its full
rear recline position:
1. Grasp the safety belt webbing at the
top of the seatback.
2. Pull the safety belt webbing forward,
firmly.
3. After pulling the safety belt forward,
allow the safety belt to feed back into
the safety belt retractor as much as
possible. If necessary, press the
E142591
seatback down to allow the safety belt
1. Buckle the combination lap and webbing to retract further.
shoulder belt. 4. The safety belt should then unlock.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull 5. If the safety belt does not unlock,
downward until the entire belt is pulled repeat steps 1-3.
out.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This WARNING
indicates the safety belt is now in the
automatic locking mode. Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the
How to Disengage the Automatic torso.
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and If the safety belt is too short when fully
shoulder belt and allow it to retract extended, you can obtain a safety belt
completely to disengage the automatic extension assembly from an authorized
locking mode and turn on the vehicle dealer.
sensitive (emergency) locking mode. Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
How to Extract Safety Belts in the Manufacturer identification is on a label
Rear Outboard Positions located either at the end of the webbing
Safety belts in the rear outboard positions or on the retractor behind the trim. Also,
can lock if the seatback is returned firmly use the safety belt extension only if the
to its upright position. You can unlock the safety belt is too short for you when fully
safety belts using the following extended.
procedures.
For vehicles where the rear seats recline:
1. Recline the seat to its full rear recline
position.
2. The safety belt should then unlock.
30

Seatbelts
SEATBELT HEIGHT To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze

the button and slide the height adjuster up
ADJUSTMENT or down. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure it is
WARNING locked in place.
Position the seatbelt height adjusters
so that the belt rests across the SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
middle of your shoulder. Failure to
adjust the seatbelt correctly could reduce AND INDICATOR CHIME
the effectiveness of the seatbelt and
increase the risk of injury in a crash. This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
E87511
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver's safety belt is not buckled The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-
before the ignition switch is turned to the 2 minutes and the warning chime sounds
on position... 4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the The safety belt warning light and warning
indicator light is illuminated and the chime turn off.
warning chime is sounding...
The driver's safety belt is buckled before The safety belt warning light and indicator
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi- chime remain off.
tion...
31

Seatbelts
SEATBELT REMINDER The system uses information from the

front passenger sensing system to
Belt-Minder™ determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
This feature supplements the safety belt of a warning. To avoid activating the
warning function by providing additional Belt-Minder feature for objects you place
reminders that intermittently sound a tone in the front passenger seat, only the front
and illuminate the safety belt warning light seat passengers receive warnings as
when you are in the driver seat or you have determined by the front passenger sensing
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is system.
unbuckled. If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.
If... Then...
You and the front seat passenger buckle The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.
your safety belts before you switch the
ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
You or the front seat passenger do not The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
buckle your safety belts before your vehicle safety belt warning light illuminates and a
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
on... or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute safety belt warning light illuminates and a
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on... or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
32

Seatbelts
Deactivating and Activating the 4. While the safety belt warning light is
Belt-Minder Feature on, buckle and then unbuckle the
safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
WARNING warning light flashes for confirmation.
While the system allows you to • This will switch the feature off for that
deactivate it, this system is designed seating position if it is currently on.
to improve your chances of being • This will switch the feature on for that
safely belted and surviving an accident. seating position if it is currently off.
We recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use your vehicle. CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently. Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
When you perform this procedure for one safety seat systems periodically to make
seating position, do not buckle the other sure they work properly and are not
position as this will terminate the process. damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before seat safety belts to make sure there are no
proceeding with the programming nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
procedure. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
Before following the procedure, make sure assemblies, buckle support assemblies
that: (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
• The parking brake is set. height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
• The transmission is in park (P).
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
• The ignition is off. attaching hardware, should be inspected
• The driver and front passenger safety after a crash. Read the child restraint
belts are unbuckled. manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the specific to the child restraint.
engine.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
turns off (about one minute). After
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
Step 2, wait an additional five seconds
if the crash was minor and an authorized
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
dealer finds that the belts do not show
you start Step 3, you must complete
damage and continue to operate properly,
the procedure within 60 seconds.
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
3. For the seating position you are belt assemblies not in use during a crash
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the should also be inspected and replaced if
safety belt three times at a moderate either damage or improper operation is
speed, ending in the unbuckled state. noted.
After Step 3, the safety belt warning
light turns on. Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 235).
33

Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System provides an How Does the Personal Safety
improved overall level of frontal crash System Work?
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of The Personal Safety System can adapt the
airbag-related injuries. The system is able deployment strategy of the safety devices
to analyze different occupant conditions according to crash severity and occupant
and crash severity before activating the conditions. A collection of crash and
appropriate safety devices to help better occupant sensors provides information to
protect a range of occupants in a variety the restraints control module. During a
of frontal crash situations. crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one
The Vehicle Personal Safety System or both stages of the dual-stage airbags
consists of: based on crash severity and occupant
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag conditions.
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and safety belt usage
sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
34

Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The airbags are a supplemental restraint

system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
WARNINGS
right front passenger from certain upper
Airbags do not inflate slowly or body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
gently, and the risk of injury from a there is a risk of injury from a deploying
deploying airbag is the greatest close airbag.
to the trim covering the airbag module.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
All occupants of your vehicle, cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
including the driver, should always airbag deploys. This is normal.
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
system is provided. Failure to properly wear upon activation. After airbag deployment,
your safety belt could seriously increase it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
the risk of injury or death. residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
Always transport children 12 years (to lubricate the bag) or sodium
old and under in the back seat and compounds (for example, baking soda)
always properly use appropriate that result from the combustion process
child restraints. Failure to follow this could that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
seriously increase the risk of injury or death. sodium hydroxide may be present which
Never place your arm over the airbag may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
module as a deploying airbag can the residue is toxic.
result in serious arm fractures or While the system is designed to help
other injuries. reduce serious injuries, contact with a
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
child seat. Never place a rear-facing or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
child seat in front of an active airbag. a possibility as a result of the noise
If you must use a forward-facing child seat associated with a deploying airbag.
in the front seat, move the seat upon which Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
the child seat is installed all the way back. with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
Do not attempt to service, repair, or facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
modify the airbag supplemental particularly to occupants who are not
restraint systems or its fuses as you properly restrained or are otherwise out of
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact position at the time of airbag deployment.
your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Thus, it is extremely important that
Several airbag system components occupants be properly restrained as far
get hot after inflation. Do not touch away from the airbag module as possible
them after inflation as this may result while maintaining vehicle control.
in serious injury. Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag required.
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
35

DRIVER AND PASSENGER Proper Driver and Front Passenger

Seating Adjustment
AIRBAGS
WARNING
WARNINGS
National Highway Traffic Safety
Never place your arm or any objects Administration (NHTSA)
over an airbag module. Placing your recommends a minimum distance
arm over a deploying airbag can of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters)
result in serious arm fractures or other between an occupant’s chest and the
injuries. Objects placed on or over the driver airbag module.
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury. To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing • Move your seat to the rear as far as you
child seat in front of an active airbag. can while still reaching the pedals
If you must use a forward-facing child seat comfortably.
in the front seat, move the seat upon which • Recline the seat slightly (one or two
the child seat is installed all the way back. degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat back, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
E151127
increased.
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near Children and Airbags
frontal crashes. WARNING
The driver and passenger front airbag Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
system consists of: child seat. Never place a rear-facing
• Driver and passenger airbag modules. child seat in front of an active airbag.
• Front passenger sensing system. If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
· Crash sensors and monitoring the child seat is installed all the way back.
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 42).
36

E145987
The indicator lamp is located in the center

stack of the instrument panel.
E142846
The front passenger sensing system is
Children must always be properly designed to disable (will not inflate) the
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that front passenger frontal airbag under
children are safer when properly restrained certain conditions:
in the rear seating positions than in the • The front passenger seat is
front seating position. Failure to follow unoccupied.
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash. • The system determines an infant is
present in a child restraint.
• A passenger takes their weight off the
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING seat for a period of time.
SYSTEM • If there is a problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing
WARNINGS system.
Even with Advanced Restraints Even with this technology, parents are
Systems, children 12 and under strongly encouraged to always properly
should be properly restrained in a restrain children in the rear seat.
rear seating position. Failure to follow this
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the front
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seat
back, with your feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system which could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
37

• When the front passenger sensing • Restart the vehicle and have the person
system disables (will not inflate) the remain in this position for about two
front passenger frontal airbag, the minutes. This will allow the system to
passenger airbag status indicator will detect that person and enable the
illuminate and stay lit to remind you passenger’s frontal airbag.
that the front passenger frontal airbag • If the passenger airbag status indicator
is disabled. lamp remains lit even after this, the
• If the passenger airbag status indicator person should be advised to ride in the
lamp indicates the passenger airbag is rear seat.
enabled, after the child restraint has Note: When the passenger airbag status
been installed, turn the vehicle off, indicator lamp is illuminated, the passenger
remove the child restraint from the side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled
vehicle and reinstall the restraint to avoid the risk of airbag deployment
following the child restraint injuries.
manufacturer’s instructions.
• If the passenger airbag status indicator After all occupants have adjusted their
lamp continues to indicate the seats and put on safety belts, it is very
passenger airbag is enabled, the child important that they continue to sit
should be properly restrained in a rear properly. A properly seated occupant sits
seating position. upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
The front passenger sensing system works feet comfortably extended on the floor.
with sensors that are part of the front Sitting improperly can increase the chance
passenger seat and safety belt. The of injury in a crash event. For example, if
sensors are designed to detect the an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
presence of a properly–seated occupant sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
and determine if the front passenger sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
frontal airbag should be enabled. chance of injury during a crash is greatly
• When the front passenger sensing increased.
system enables the front passenger If you think that the status of the passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, check
passenger airbag status indicator will for the following:
not illuminate. • Objects lodged underneath the seat.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front • Objects between the seat cushion and
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag the center console.
is disabled, it is possible that the person is
not sitting properly in the seat. If this • Objects hanging off the seatback.
happens: • Objects stowed in the seatback map
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person pocket.
to place the seatback in the full upright • Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
position. • Cargo interference with the seat.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, • Other passengers pushing or pulling on
centered on the seat cushion, with the the seat.
person's legs comfortably extended.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
38

The conditions listed above may cause the SIDE AIRBAGS

weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger WARNINGS
sensing system. The person in the front
passenger seat may appear heavier or Do not place objects or mount
lighter due to the conditions described in equipment on or near the airbag
the list above. cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
Make sure the front passenger that may come into contact with a
sensing system is operating deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
properly. See Crash Sensors instructions may increase the risk of
and Airbag Indicator (page 42). personal injury in the event of a crash.
If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do Do not use accessory seat covers.
the following: The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
Check for objects that are lodged side airbags and increase the risk of injury
underneath the front passenger seat, or in an accident.
cargo interfering with the seat.
Do not lean your head on the door.
If there are lodged objects, or cargo is The side airbag could injure you as it
interfering with the seat, take the following deploys from the side of the
steps to remove the obstruction: seatback.
• Pull the vehicle over. Do not attempt to service, repair, or
• Turn the vehicle off. modify the airbag, its fuses or the
• Driver or adult passengers should seat cover on a seat containing an
check for any objects lodged airbag as you could be seriously injured or
underneath the front passenger seat killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
or cargo interfering with the seat. soon as possible.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found). If the side airbag has deployed, the
• Restart the vehicle. airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
• Wait at least two minutes and verify seat) must be inspected and serviced by
that the airbag readiness lamp is no an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
longer illuminated. replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
• If the airbag readiness lamp remains the risk of injury in a crash.
illuminated, this may or may not be a
problem due to the front passenger The side airbags are located on the
sensing system. outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
Do not attempt to repair or service the seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
system; take your vehicle immediately to airbag on the side affected by the crash
an authorized dealer. will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
If it is necessary to modify an advanced occupant to further enhance the protection
front airbag system to accommodate a provided occupants in side impact crashes.
person with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
39

DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG

A driver's knee airbag is located under the
instrument panel. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the
driver's knee airbag based on crash severity
and occupant conditions. Under certain
crash and occupant conditions, the driver’s
knee airbag may deploy but the driver’s
front airbag may not activate. As with front
and side airbags, it is important to be
E152533
properly seated and restrained to reduce
the risk of death or serious injury.
The system consists of the following: Make sure the knee airbag is
• A label or embossed side panel operating properly. See Crash
indicating that side airbags are fitted Sensors and Airbag Indicator
to your vehicle. (page 42).
• Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
at the siderail that may come into
with readiness indicator. See Crash
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
Failure to follow these instructions may
42).
increase the risk of personal injury in the
Note: The passenger sensing system will event of a crash.
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
Do not lean your head on the door.
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
The curtain airbag could injure you
seat.
as it deploys from the headliner.
The design and development of the side
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
airbag system included recommended
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
testing procedures that were developed
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
by a group of automotive safety experts
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain
known as the Side Airbag Technical
airbags as you could be seriously injured
Working Group. These recommended
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
as soon as possible.
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
40

WARNINGS
All occupants of your vehicle
including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the curtain
airbag.
E75004
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function The system consists of the following:
again. The curtain airbags (including • Safety canopy curtain airbags located
the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) above the trim panels over the front
must be inspected and serviced by an and rear side windows identified by a
authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is label or wording on the headliner or
not replaced, the unrepaired area will roof-pillar trim.
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
The Safety Canopy will deploy during deployment
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected · Crash sensors and monitoring
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy system with a readiness
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet indicator. See Crash Sensors
metal, behind the headliner, above each and Airbag Indicator (page 42).
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
Children 12 years old and under should
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
always be properly restrained in the rear
be activated, regardless of which seats are
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
with children restrained using a properly
to inflate between the side window area
installed child or booster seat because it
and occupants to further enhance
is designed to inflate downward from the
protection provided in side impact crashes
headliner above the doors along the side
and rollover events.
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
41

CRASH SENSORS AND If any of these things happen, even

intermittently, have the supplemental
AIRBAG INDICATOR restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
WARNING system may not function properly in the
Modifying or adding equipment to event of a crash.
the front end of the vehicle (including The safety belt pretensioners and the front
frame, bumper, front end body airbag supplemental restraint system are
structure and tow hooks) may affect the designed to activate when the vehicle
performance of the airbag system, sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify cause the restraints control module to
the front end of the vehicle. deploy a safety device.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and or front airbags did not activate for both
occupant sensors which provide front seat occupants in a crash does not
information to the restraints control mean that something is wrong with the
module. The restraints control module system. Rather, it means the restraints
deploys (activates) the front safety belt control module determined the accident
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side were not appropriate to activate these
airbags and Safety Canopy airbags. Based safety devices.
on the type of crash (frontal impact or side
impact), the restraints control module will • The design of the front airbags is to
deploy the appropriate safety devices. activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
The restraints control module also rear impacts unless the crash causes
monitors the readiness of the above safety sufficient frontal deceleration).
devices plus the crash and occupant
• The safety belt pretensioners are
sensors. The readiness of the safety
designed to activate in frontal,
system is indicated by a warning indicator
near-frontal and side crashes.
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not • The knee airbag(s) may deploy based
working. Routine maintenance of the on crash severity and occupant
airbag is not required. conditions.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by • The design of the side airbags is to
one or more of the following: inflate in certain side crashes. The
design of the Safety Canopy is to
The readiness light will not inflate in certain side impact crashes
illuminate immediately after the and when a certain likelihood of
ignition is turned on. rollover is detected by the rollover
sensor. Side airbags and Safety Canopy
• The readiness light will either flash or airbags may activate in other types of
stay lit. crashes if the vehicle experiences
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The sufficient sideways motion or
tone pattern will repeat periodically deformation.
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
42

AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
43

Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • Structures around the vehicle.

• Other vehicles parked next to your
The remote control allows you to: vehicle.
• Remotely lock or unlock the vehicle The radio frequency used by your remote
doors. control can also be used by other radio
• Unlock the doors without actively using transmitters, for example amateur radios,
a key or remote control (intelligent medical equipment, wireless headphones,
access only). wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
• Remotely open the power liftgate (if
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
equipped).
able to use your remote control. You can
• Remotely start or stop the engine and lock and unlock the doors with the key.
user pre-set features (if equipped).
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft system. leaving it unattended.
• Activate the panic alarm.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
GENERAL INFORMATION ON unintentionally.
RADIO FREQUENCIES Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
This device complies with Part 15 of the The system uses a radio frequency signal
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada to communicate with your vehicle and
license-exempt RSS standard(s). authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
Operation is subject to the following two of the following conditions are met:
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
• You activate the front exterior door
harmful interference, and (2) This device
handle switch.
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause • You press the luggage compartment
undesired operation. button.
Note: Changes or modifications not • You press a button on the transmitter.
expressively approved by the party If excessive radio frequency interference
responsible for compliance could void the is present in the area or if the transmitter
user's authority to operate the equipment. battery is low, you may need to
The term IC before the radio certification mechanically unlock your door. You can
number only signifies that Industry Canada use the mechanical key blade in your
technical specifications were met. intelligent access key to open the driver
The typical operating range for your door in this situation. See Remote
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m). Control (page 45).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range.
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
44

REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
(If Equipped)
E138616
Your intelligent access keys operate the

power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to activate
the push-button start system.
E222511
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and

unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
E142431
The intelligent access key also contains a

removable mechanical key blade that you
can use to unlock the driver door. Slide the
release on the back of the transmitter to
release the key blade, then pull the blade
E138615 out.
Note: Your vehicle’s keys came with a

security label that provides important
vehicle key cut information. Keep the label
in a safe place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)

Note: A three-button remote control
operates similarly. E138618
Note: Your vehicle’s back-up keys came
with a security tag that provides important
vehicle key cut information. Keep the tag in
a safe place for future reference.
45

Replacing the Battery 3. Insert the new battery. Refer to the

instructions inside the transmitter for
Note: Refer to local regulations when the correct orientation of the battery.
disposing of transmitter batteries. Press the battery down to make sure
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the it is fully in the housing.
battery terminals or on the back surface of 4. Snap the battery cover back onto the
the circuit board. transmitter.
Note: Replacing the battery does not delete
Intelligent Access Transmitter
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally. 1. Remove the backup key from the
The remote control uses one coin-type transmitter.
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
E142432
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden

behind the backup key head to remove
the battery cover. Do not use the
E138619 backup key to remove the cover or you
could damage the intelligent access
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
key.
transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover.
2. Remove the old battery.
E138620
E138622
3. Remove the old battery.
46

4. Insert a new battery with the + facing Vehicles with automatic climate control
downward. Press the battery down to can be configured to operate when the
make sure it is fully in the housing. vehicle is remote started. See Automatic
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the Climate Control (page 101).
transmitter and install the backup key. Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Car Finder Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
Press the button twice within
remote start systems.
three seconds. The horn sounds
E138623 and the direction indicators The remote start system does not work if:
flash. We recommend you use this method • The ignition is on.
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm. • The alarm system is triggered.
• You disable the feature.
Note: If locking was not successful or if any
door or the liftgate is open, or if the hood is • The hood is open.
open on vehicles with a perimeter alarm or • The transmission is not in park (P).
remote start, the horn sounds twice and the
• The vehicle battery voltage is too low.
lamps do not flash.
• The service engine soon indicator was
Sounding a Panic Alarm on the last time your vehicle was
driven.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off. Remote Starting the Vehicle
Press the button to activate the Note: You must press each button within
alarm. Press the button again or three seconds of each other. If you do not
E138624 switch the ignition on to follow this sequence your vehicle does not
deactivate. remote start, the exterior lamps do not flash
twice and the horn does not sound.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle E138626

is low on fuel.
The label on your transmitter details the
The remote start button is on the starting procedure.
transmitter.
E138625 To remote start your vehicle:
This feature allows you to start your 1. Press the lock button to lock all the
vehicle from outside the vehicle. The doors.
transmitter has an extended operating
range.
47

2. Press the remote start button twice. You can disable or enable the remote start
The exterior lamps flash twice. system through the information display.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start, See General Information (page 87).
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch it on or off in the REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
information display. See General REMOTE CONTROL
Information (page 87).
Note: If you remote start your vehicle with Replacement keys or remote controls can
an intelligent access transmitter, you must be purchased from an authorized dealer.
press the START/STOP button on the Authorized dealers can program remote
instrument panel once while applying the controls for your vehicle. See Passive
brake pedal before driving your vehicle. Anti-Theft System (page 65).
Remote start does not turn on the power

windows and does not automatically start
the radio.
The parking lamps remain on and the
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start duration. If the duration is set
to last 10 minutes, you can extend the
duration for another 10 minutes. For
example, if the vehicle had been running
from the first remote start for five minutes,
the vehicle continues to run now for a total
of 20 minutes. You can only extend the
remote start once. You may be able to
extend late-build vehicles successively up
to 30 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
E138625
You may have to be closer to the
vehicle than when starting due to ground
reflection and the added noise of the
running vehicle.
48

MyKey™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Non-configurable Settings

The following settings cannot be changed
MyKey allows you to program keys with
by an admin key user:
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys • Belt-minder. You cannot disable this
programmed to the vehicle can be feature. The audio system will mute
activated with these restricted modes. when the safety belts are not fastened.
Any keys that have not been programmed • Early low fuel warning. The low-fuel
are referred to as administrator keys or warning activates earlier, giving the
admin keys. These can be used to: MyKey user more time to refuel.
• Create a MyKey. • Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
• Program configurable MyKey settings. blind spot information system (BLIS)
• Clear all MyKey features. with cross traffic alert, lane departure
When you have created a MyKey, you can warning and forward collision warning
access the following information using the system.
information display: Configurable Settings
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle. With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
• The total distance your vehicle has
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
traveled using any MyKey.
key or restart the vehicle.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
You can also change the settings
same settings. You cannot program them
afterward with an admin key:
individually.
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Note: For vehicles with keyless start, when Warnings will be shown in the display
both a MyKey transmitter and an admin followed by an audible tone when your
transmitter are present, the admin vehicle reaches the set speed. You
transmitter will be recognized by the vehicle cannot override the set speed by fully
to start the engine. depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting the cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
49

MyKey™
• Vehicle speed minders. Once you select MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
a speed, it will be shown in the display you label it so you can distinguish it from
followed by an audible tone when the the admin keys.
set vehicle speed is exceeded. You can also program configurable
• Audio system maximum volume of settings for the key(s). Refer to
45%. A message will be shown in the Programming/Changing Configurable
display when you attempt to exceed Settings.
the limited volume. Also, the speed
sensitive compensated volume Programming/Changing
(automatic volume control) feature Configurable Settings
will be disabled.
Use the information display to access your
• Always on setting. When this is configurable MyKey settings:
selected you will not be able to disable
the traction control system (if your 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
vehicle is equipped with this feature). key or fob.
2. Access the main menu on the
CREATING A MYKEY information display controls, and select
Settings, then MyKey by pressing OK
Use the information display to create a or the > button.
MyKey: 3. Use the arrow buttons to get to a
configurable feature.
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with 4. Press OK or > to make a selection.
a push-button start, hold the intelligent Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
access key next to the steering column. settings at any time during the same key
Details on the correct fob placement and cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
position is in another chapter. See have switched the engine off, however, you
Starting and Stopping the Engine (page will need an admin key to change or clear
123). your MyKey settings.
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
information display controls, and select
Settings and then MyKey by pressing OK You can clear or change your MyKey
or the > button. settings using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
4. Press OK or the > button to select
Information Displays (page 87).
Create MyKey.
Switch the ignition on using an admin key
5. When prompted, hold the OK button
or remote control.
until you see a message informing you to
label this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at your vehicle's next start.
50

MyKey™
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Message Action and Description
Settings Press the OK button.

MyKey Press the OK button.
Clear MyKey Press and hold the OK button until the following message
displays.
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
51

MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM You can find information on programmed

MyKey(s) using the information display
STATUS control on the steering wheel. See
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to

access the main menu and scroll to:
Message Description
Settings Press the OK button.

MyKey Press the OK button.
Select one of the following:
MyKey Dist. Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
{0} MyKeys Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} Admin Keys Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
52

MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start

systems. If you choose to install a remote
START SYSTEMS start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MyKey is not compatible with non
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential Causes
I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start the

vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
• Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless
start transmitter is not placed in the backup
position. See Starting a Gasoline Engine
(page 124).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable • The key or transmitter used to start your
settings. vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 50).
I cannot clear the MyKeys. • The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
MyKey (page 50).
I lost the only admin key. Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.
53

MyKey™
Condition Potential Causes
I lost a key. Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft

System (page 65).
MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.
No MyKey functions with the keyless • An admin transmitter is present at vehicle

entry transmitter. start.
MyKey (page 50).
54

Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
You can use the power door lock control seconds to disable or enable two-stage
or the remote control to lock and unlock unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
your vehicle. allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one
press of the button. The turn signals will
Power Door Locks flash twice to indicate a change to the
unlocking mode. The unlocking mode
The power door lock control is on the driver applies to the remote control, keyless entry
and front passenger door panels. keypad and intelligent access.
Intelligent access at the driver door will
unlock all doors when you disable
two-stage unlocking.
Locking the Doors

Press the button to lock all the
doors. The turn signals will flash.
E138623
E138628 Press the button again within
three seconds to confirm that all the doors
are closed. The doors will lock again, the
A Unlock
horn will sound and the turn signals will
B Lock flash if all the doors and the luggage
compartment are closed.
Door Lock Indicator Note: If locking was not successful or any
An LED on the instrument panel will light door or the liftgate is open, or if the hood is
when you lock the doors. It is not a open on vehicles with a perimeter alarm or
functional control. remote start, the horn will sound twice and
the lamps will not flash.
Remote Control
Liftgate
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock) WARNINGS
Make sure all persons are clear of the
Press the button to unlock the liftgate area before using the liftgate
driver door. control.
E138629
Press the button again within Make sure to close and latch the
three seconds to unlock all doors. The turn liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
signals will flash. fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
55

Locks
Note: Be careful when opening or closing Right-Hand Side

the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
Turn counterclockwise to lock.
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Press twice within three seconds Opening a Rear Door from Inside
to:
E138630 Pull the interior door release handle twice
to unlock and open a rear door. The first
• unlatch a manual liftgate
pull unlocks the door and the second pull
• open, close or stop the movement of will unlatch the door.
a power liftgate. See Power Liftgate
(page 60). Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
Mechanical Key
The intelligent access key must be within
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
3 feet (1 meter) of your vehicle.
your vehicle once to lock all doors.
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of At the Front Doors
your vehicle once to unlock the driver door
Pull a front exterior door handle to unlock
only.
and open the door. The unlock sensor is on
Locking the Doors Individually the back of the handle. Make sure not to
touch the lock sensor area on the front of
If the power locks fail to operate, lock the the handle.
doors individually using the key in the
position shown.
E185863
Touch the lock sensor area for a few

seconds to lock your vehicle. To avoid
inadvertently unlocking the door, make
sure you only touch the lock sensor and no
E112203
other area of the door handle.
Left-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock.
56

Locks
After locking the doors with the lock When you lock your vehicle using the
sensor, there is a brief delay before you can power door lock control (with the door
unlock your vehicle. This delay lets you pull open, vehicle in park and ignition off), your
the handle to make sure it locked. vehicle will search for an intelligent access
key in the passenger compartment after
Note: Keep the door handle surface clean
you close the door. If your vehicle finds a
to avoid issues with operation.
key, all of the doors will immediately
At the Liftgate unlock.
In order to override the smart unlock
Press the exterior liftgate release button
feature and intentionally lock the
on the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
intelligent access key inside your vehicle,
Smart Unlocks For Integrated you can lock your vehicle after all doors
Keyhead Transmitter are closed by using the keyless entry
keypad, pressing the lock button on
This feature helps to prevent you from another intelligent access key or touching
locking yourself out of your vehicle if your the locking area on the handle with another
key is still in the ignition. intelligent access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all the doors will lock then unlock control, all doors will lock then unlock if
if your key is still in the ignition. the ignition is on.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key Autolock (If Equipped)
in the ignition by either:
• using the keyless entry keypad with the The autolock feature will lock all the doors
driver door closed when:
• pressing the lock button on the • all doors are closed,
transmitter even if the doors are not • the ignition is on,
closed.
• you shift into any gear putting your
If both front doors are closed, you can lock vehicle in motion, and
your vehicle by any method, regardless of • your vehicle attains a speed greater
whether the key is in the ignition or not. than 4 mph (7 km/h).
Smart Unlocks For Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
unintentionally locking your intelligent
access key inside your vehicle’s passenger
compartment or rear cargo area.
57

Locks
Autounlock (If Equipped) Autounlock: Press the power door lock

button then the unlock button. The horn
The autounlock feature will unlock all the will sound once if disabled or twice (one
doors when: short and one long) if enabled.
• the ignition is on, all the doors are
After programming the feature, switch the
closed, and your vehicle has been in
ignition off. The horn will sound once
motion at a speed greater than 4 mph
indicating programming is complete.
(7 km/h);
• your vehicle comes to a stop and you Note: You can enable or disable the
switch the ignition off or to accessory; autounlock feature independently of the
and autolock feature.
• you open the driver door within 10 Illuminated Entry
minutes of the switching the ignition
off or to accessory. The interior lamps and select exterior
lamps will illuminate when you unlock the
Note: The doors will not autounlock if you doors with the remote entry system.
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open The illuminated entry system will turn off
the driver door. the lights if:
• you start your vehicle,
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock • you press the remote control lock
button, or
Note: Your authorized dealer can perform • after 25 seconds of illumination.
this procedure, or you can do the procedure
yourself. The lights will not turn off if:
To enable or disable these features, do the • you turn them on with the lamp control,
following: or
Note: You will have 30 seconds to • any door is open.
complete the procedure. Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and select exterior
2. Press the power door unlock button lamps will illuminate when all doors are
three times. closed and you switch the ignition off.
3. Switch the ignition off. The lamps will turn off if all the doors
4. Press the power door unlock button remain closed and:
three times. • 25 seconds elapse, or
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn will • you lock your vehicle from the outside.
sound indicating your vehicle is in
programming mode. Battery Saver
Autolock: Press the power door unlock If you leave the courtesy lamps or dome
button then the lock button. The horn will lamps on and switch the ignition off, the
sound once if disabled or twice (one short battery saver shuts them off after some
and one long) if enabled. time.
58

Locks
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Opening the Liftgate

Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)
Manually
If you leave the ignition on after leaving
your vehicle, it will shut off 15 minutes after
you close all of the doors.
MANUAL LIFTGATE
WARNINGS
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride E138632
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Be sure Press the button located in the top of the
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the
using a seatbelt properly. Failure to follow liftgate, and then pull on the outside
this warning could result in serious handle.
personal injury or death.
With the Remote Control
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust Press the button twice within
fumes into your vehicle. This will also three seconds.
prevent passengers and cargo from falling E138630
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,

keep the vents or windows open so outside Closing the Liftgate
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing

the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while E155976
driving. This could damage the liftgate and

A handle is located inside the liftgate to
its components.
help with closing.
59

Locks
POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped) • The ignition is on and the transmission

is not in park (P).
WARNINGS • The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
cargo area, inside or outside of a • The vehicle speed is at or above 1 mph
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in (1 km/h).
these areas are more likely to be seriously If the liftgate starts to close after it has
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride fully opened, this indicates there may be
in any area of your vehicle that is not excessive weight on the liftgate or a
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make possible gas strut failure. A repetitive
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat chime sounds and the liftgate closes under
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to control. Remove any excessive weight from
follow this warning could result in serious the liftgate. If the liftgate continues to
personal injury or death. close after opening, have the system
Make sure to close and latch the checked by an authorized dealer.
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also Opening and Closing the Liftgate
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open, WARNING
keep the vents or windows open so outside Make sure all persons are clear of the
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to power liftgate area before using the
follow this warning could result in serious power liftgate control.
personal injury.
Keep keys out of reach of children. Note: Be careful when opening or closing
Do not allow children to operate or the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
play near an open or moving power area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
liftgate. You should supervise the Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
operation of the power liftgate at all times. driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle, From the Instrument Panel
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
Press the button on the
a parking structure. This could damage the
instrument panel near the
liftgate and its components. E211694
lighting control.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This With the Remote Control
could damage the liftgate and its
components. Press the button twice within
three seconds.
The liftgate only operates with the E138630
transmission in park (P).
Three warning tones sound once as the
liftgate begins to power close. Five short
chimes indicate a problem with the open
or close request, caused by:
60

Locks
With the Outside Control Button

Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
E138636
Press and release the liftgate control
button.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement

You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
E138632
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
2. Press the button in the top of the remote control twice.
liftgate pull-cup handle. • Pressing the liftgate button on the
Note: Allow the system to open the liftgate. instrument panel.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may • Moving your foot under and away from
turn on obstacle detection and stop the the center rear bumper in a single-kick
*
power operation or reverse its direction. motion.
Manually interfering with the liftgate motion *
may also replicate a gas strut failure. This method only works for vehicles with
the hands-free liftgate feature.
Closing the Liftgate
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
WARNING
1. Open the liftgate.
Keep clear of the liftgate when
activating the rear switch. 2. Stop the liftgate by pressing the control
button on the liftgate when it reaches
the desired height.
Note: When the liftgate has stopped
moving, you can also manually move it to
the desired height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control
button on the liftgate until a tone
sounds, indicating programming is
complete.
61

Locks
Note: You can only use the liftgate control

button to program the height. 2
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the
power liftgate, you can manually move it
to a different height. You can fully open
the liftgate by manually pushing it upward
to the maximum open position.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height, even if you disconnect 1
the battery. E161602
1. Move your foot under and away from

Obstacle Detection the rear bumper detection area in a
When Closing single-kick motion. Do not move your
foot sideways or the sensors may not
The system stops when it detects an detect the motion.
obstacle. Two short tones sound and the 2. The liftgate powers open or close.
system reverses to open. When you
remove the obstacle, you can power close Note: Allow the power system to open the
the liftgate. liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
Note: Entering your vehicle while the detection feature and stop the power
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to operation or reverse its direction. Manually
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To interfering with the liftgate motion may also
prevent this, let the power liftgate close replicate a gas strut failure.
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument Note: Splashing water may cause the
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
warning indicator. Failure to do this could intelligent access key away from the rear
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate bumper detection area when washing your
open while driving. vehicle.
When Opening
KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped)
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound. When SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
you remove the obstacle, you can continue KEYPAD
to operate the liftgate.
The keypad is located near the driver
Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped) window. It is invisible until touched and
then it lights up so you can see and touch
Make sure you have an intelligent access the appropriate buttons.
transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.
62

Locks
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
on the keypad, the unlock function may not that programming was successful.
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly. To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• press 3·4 to save personal code 2
• press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code

E138637
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
You can use the keypad to: 2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
• lock or unlock the doors within five seconds.
• program and erase user codes 3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
• arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm. This must be done within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code All personal codes will erase and only the
is located on the owner’s wallet card in the factory-set five-digit code will work.
glove box and is available from an
authorized dealer. You can also create up Anti-Scan Feature
to five of your own five-digit personal entry The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
codes. if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
Programming a Personal Entry Code mode disables the keypad for one minute
To create your own personal entry code: and the keypad lamp will flash.
1. Enter the factory-set code. The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five • one minute of keypad inactivity
seconds. • pressing the unlock button on the
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You remote control
must enter each number within five • switching the ignition on
seconds of each other. • unlocking the vehicle using intelligent
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save access.
personal code 1.
63

Locks
Unlocking and Locking the Doors

To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is disabled. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 55).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 control within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time with the driver door closed. You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
64

Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT Replacement Keys

SYSTEM Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters or two
Note: The system is not compatible with intelligent access keys.
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. The integrated keyhead transmitter
Use of these systems may result in vehicle functions as a programmed ignition key
starting problems and a loss of security that operates all the locks and starts the
protection. vehicle, as well as a remote control.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices The intelligent access key functions as a
or a second coded key on the same key programmed key that operates the driver
chain may cause vehicle starting problems door lock and activates the intelligent
if they are too close to the key when starting access with push button start system, as
the engine. Prevent these objects from well as a remote control.
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all If your programmed transmitters or
objects on the key chain away from the standard SecuriLock coded keys
coded key and restart the engine if a (integrated keyhead transmitters only) are
problem occurs. lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and need to erase the key codes from your
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle. vehicle and program new coded keys.
SecuriLock® Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
The system is an engine immobilization any inconveniences. See your authorized
system. It is designed to help prevent the dealer to purchase additional spare or
engine from being started unless a coded replacement keys.
key programmed to your vehicle is used.
Using the wrong key may prevent the Programming a Spare Integrated
engine from starting. A message may Keyhead Transmitter
appear in the information display.
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
If you are unable to start the engine with a coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be
correctly coded key, a malfunction has integrated keyhead transmitters.
happened and a message may appear in
the information display. You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
Automatic Arming SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure will program both the engine
The vehicle arms immediately after you immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
switch the ignition off. portion of the remote control to your
vehicle
Automatic Disarming
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
Switching the ignition on with a coded key or standard SecuriLock keys.
disarms the vehicle.
65

Security
You must have two previously Programming a Spare Intelligent

programmed coded keys and the new Access Key
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See
your authorized dealer to have the spare See your authorized dealer to have
key programmed if two previously additional keys programmed to your
programmed coded keys are not available. vehicle.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin. ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped)
1. Insert the first previously programmed
The system will warn you of an
coded key into the ignition.
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep be triggered if any door, the luggage
the ignition on for at least three compartment or the hood is opened
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. without using the key, remote control or
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the keyless entry keypad.
first coded key from the ignition. The direction indicators will flash and the
4. After three seconds but within 10 horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
seconds of switching the ignition off, attempted while the alarm is armed.
insert the second previously coded key Take all remote controls to an authorized
into the ignition. dealer if there is any potential alarm
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep problem with your vehicle.
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. Arming the Alarm
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the The alarm is ready to arm when there is
second previously programmed coded not a key in the ignition. Electronically lock
key from the ignition. the vehicle to arm the alarm.
7. After three seconds but within 10 The message indicator flashes
seconds of switching the ignition off when theft protection is active.
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition. Disarming the Alarm
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep Disarm the alarm by any of the following
the ignition on for at least six seconds. actions:
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
• Unlock the doors or luggage
key from the ignition.
compartment with the remote control
If the key has been successfully or keyless entry keypad.
programmed it will start the engine and • Switch the ignition on or start the
operate the remote entry system (if the vehicle.
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter). • Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock
the vehicle, then switch the ignition on
If programming was not successful, wait within 12 seconds.
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your Note: Pressing the panic button on the
vehicle to your authorized dealer. remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
66

Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 107).
2
3
E95179
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped)

Select the required source on the audio
unit.
2
1
E95178
1. Unlock the steering column.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
67

Steering Wheel
You can operate the following functions VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
with the control:
D B
E186192
Press the control to select or deselect

voice control. See your SYNC information.
C
CRUISE CONTROL
E159789
A Volume up.
B Seek up, next or end call.
C Volume down.
D Seek down, previous or accept
call.
Seek, Next or Previous

Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
E142437
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to: See Using Cruise Control (page 160).
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
68

Steering Wheel
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E130248
See Information Displays (page 87).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If

Equipped)
Press the button to switch the heated

steering wheel on and off.
Note: You can locate the heated steering
wheel control under the climate controls.
69

Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS Intermittent Wipe
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before

you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers and vehicle power off before using
an automatic car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. See Checking the Wiper
Blades (page 224). If that does not resolve
the issue, install new wiper blades. See
Changing the Wiper Blades (page 224). E197526
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry

windshield. This may scratch the glass, A Short-wipe interval.
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper B Intermittent wipe.
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry C Long-wipe interval.
windshield.
Push the wiper lever up to switch the
wipers on, and then use the rotary control
to adjust the intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers (If Equipped)

When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
E197525 you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
A Single wipe. wipers and ignition off before using an
B Intermittent wipe. automatic car wash.
C Normal wipe. Autowipers uses a rain sensor located in
the area around the interior mirror. The rain
D High-speed wipe.
sensor monitors the amount of moisture
Note: Move to position O marked on the on the windshield and automatically turns
wiper lever to switch off. the wipers on. It will adjust the wiper speed
by the amount of moisture that the sensor
detects on the windshield.
70

Wipers and Washers
Note: If you switch autolamps on in

conjunction with autowipers, your low beam
headlamps turn on automatically when the
rain sensor activates the windshield wipers
continuously. See General Information
(page 87).
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
E215460
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
A Highest sensitivity. smearing. In these conditions, you can do
B On. the following to help keep your windshield
clear:
C Lowest sensitivity.
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
Switch the autowipers on by moving the to reduce the amount of smearing.
wiper lever up to the first position. • Switch to normal or high-speed wipe
by moving the wiper lever up.
Switch the autowipers off by moving the
wiper lever down. • Switch the autowipers off and switch
intermittent mode on through the
Use the rotary control to adjust the information display. See General
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you Information (page 87).
select low sensitivity, the wipers will
operate when the sensor detects a large • Switch the autowipers off by moving
amount of water on the windshield. When the wiper lever down.
you select high sensitivity, the wipers will Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
operate when the sensor detects a small blades if they begin to leave streaks or
amount of water on the windshield. smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
The autowipers feature is active and ready install new wiper blades. See Changing
when the wiper lever is in the first position the Wiper Blades (page 224).
and selected in the information display.
You can change the autowipers feature to WINDSHIELD WASHERS
intermittent wipers through the
information display. See General Note: Do not operate the washers when
Information (page 87). the washer reservoir is empty. This may
Note: Check your wiper function in the cause the washer pump to overheat.
information display. See General
Information (page 87). The autowipers
feature functions only when you select the
menu choice in the information display and
you move the wiper lever up to the first
position. The autowipers feature then
remains on in the information display menu
until you change it to intermittent wipe.
71

Wipers and Washers
When you shift into reverse (R) and the

front wipers are on, the rear wiper may
automatically turn on to intermittent wipe.
Rear Window Washer
E197528
To operate the washers and spray the

windshield, pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers will
operate for a short time.
E197529
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND Push the lever away from you to operate
WASHERS the rear window washer. When you release
the lever, wiping continues for a short
period of time.
Rear Window Wiper
Note: Make sure you switch the rear
window wiper and ignition off before using
an automatic car wash.
E197647
A Intermittent wipe.
B Low speed wipe.
C Off.
Press the top of the button to switch

intermittent wipe on. Press the top of the
button again to switch low speed wipe on.
Press the bottom of the button to switch
the rear window wiper off.
72

Lighting
LIGHTING CONTROL Headlamp Flasher
E162680
E142449
Pull the lever toward you slightly and
A Off release it to flash the headlamps.
B Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
tail lamps
C Headlamps WARNING
The autolamps switch position may
High Beams not activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Always ensure that your headlamps
are switched to auto or on, as appropriate,
during all low visibility conditions. Failure
to do so may result in a collision.
E162679
Push the lever forward to switch the high

beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams E142451
off.
When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps
automatically turn on in low light situations
or when the wipers activate.
73

Lighting
If equipped, the following also activate INSTRUMENT LIGHTING

when the lighting control is in the
autolamps position and you switch them DIMMER
on in the information display:
Note: You disable the manual dimmer
• Configurable daytime running lamps. when you adjust the setting to Auto
• Automatic high beam control. Dimming in the information display. See
• Adaptive headlamp control. Information Displays (page 87).
The headlamps remain on for a period of Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
time after you switch the ignition off. Use becomes discharged, the illuminated
the information display controls to adjust components will switch to the maximum
the period of time that the headlamps setting.
remain on. See Information Displays
(page 87).
Note: With the headlamps in the
autolamps position, you cannot switch the
high beam headlamps on until the
autolamps system turns the low beam
headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated

Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after
E161902
you switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper Press repeatedly or press and hold until
activation: you reach the desired level.
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
fluid during a wash condition.
After you switch the ignition off, you can
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode. switch the headlamps on by pulling the
Note: If you switch autolamps and direction indicator lever toward you. You
autowipers on, the headlamps will will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield switch off automatically after three
wipers continuously operate. minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
after the last door has been closed. You
can cancel this feature by pulling the
direction indicator toward you again or
switching the ignition on.
74

Lighting
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If 3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
Equipped) or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
WARNING 4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
The daytime running lamps system position.
does not activate the rear lamps and 5. The headlamps are off.
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions. Also, The other lighting control switch positions
the autolamps switch position may not do not activate the daytime running lamps,
activate the headlamps in all low visibility and you can use them to temporarily
conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure override autolamp control.
the headlamps are switched to auto or on, When switched off in the information
as appropriate, during all low visibility display, the daytime running lamps are off
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a in all lighting control switch positions.
crash.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type 2 - Configurable
E210814
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display controls. Press the button to switch the fog lamps
See Information Displays (page 87). on or off.
The daytime running lamps turn on when: You can switch the fog lamps on when the
1. They are switched on in the information lighting control is in any position except
display. See Information Displays off.
(page 87).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
75

Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped)
A
E162681 E142455
Push the lever up or down to use the You can switch individual map lamps on
direction indicators. independently by pressing switch A.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the

direction indicators flash three times to AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
indicate a lane change.
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps will switch on when:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
Front Interior Lamp
E181171
A. Left-hand lamp.
B. Right-hand lamp.
76

Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS One-Touch Up (If Equipped)

Lift the control fully and release it. Press
WARNINGS or lift it again to stop the window.
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play Window Lock
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
E70850
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear

window controls. It lights when the rear
window controls lock.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)

The window stops automatically while
E70848 closing. It reverses some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window. Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when WARNING
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this When you override the bounce-back
noise. feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
One-Touch Down (If Equipped) when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Press the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window. Proceed as follows to override this
protection feature when there is a
resistance, for example in winter:
77

Windows and Mirrors
1. Close the window twice until it reaches Accessory Delay (If Equipped)
the point of resistance and let it
reverse. You can use the window controls for
several minutes after switching off the
2. Close the window a third time to the
ignition or until opening either front door.
point of resistance. You disabled the
bounce-back feature and you can now
close the window manually. The EXTERIOR MIRRORS
window travels past the point of
resistance and you can close it fully. Power Exterior Mirrors
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if the window does not close after WARNING
the third attempt. Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
The bounce-back feature remains
turned off until you reset the
memory.
If you have disconnected the battery, you

must reset the bounce-back memory
separately for each window.
1. Lift and hold the control until the A C
window is fully closed.
B
2. Release the control. E70846
3. Lift and hold the control again for a few

seconds. A Left-hand mirror
4. Release the control. B Off
5. Lift and hold the control again for a few C Right-hand mirror
seconds.
6. Release the control.
7. Press and hold the control until the
window is fully open.
8. Lift and hold the control until the
window is fully closed.
9. Release the control.
10. Open the window and then try to
close it automatically.
11. Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close automatically. E70847
Press the arrows to adjust the mirror.
78

Windows and Mirrors
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors

Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)

See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page C
105).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)

You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 112).
B
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear. A
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated E138665

convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They are The image of the approaching vehicle is
designed to increase your visibility along small and near the inboard edge of the
the side of your vehicle. main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
Check the main mirror first before a lane outboard across the main mirror as the
change, then check the blind spot mirror. vehicle approaches (A). The image will
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot transition from the main mirror and begin
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
is at a safe distance, signal that you intend vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle will
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder transition to your peripheral field of view
to verify traffic is clear and carefully as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
change lanes.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 161).
79

Windows and Mirrors
INTERIOR MIRROR SUN VISORS

WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of

any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the E138666
mirror head up or down and from side to
side. Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you shade.
to reduce glare at night.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up. E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
80

Windows and Mirrors
WARNINGS Press and release the rear of the control

When closing the moonroof, you to open the moonroof. If it is closed, the
should verify that it is free of sunscreen will automatically open before
obstructions and make sure that the moonroof opens. The moonroof will
children and pets are not in the proximity stop short of the fully opened position.
of the roof opening. Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
The moonroof and sunscreen controls are the moonroof fully open. Press and hold the
located on the overhead console. control again to fully open the moonroof.
The moonroof and sunscreen have a Press and release the front of the control
one-touch open and close feature. To stop to close the moonroof.
them during one-touch operation, press
the control a second time. Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically
Opening and Closing the while closing. It will reverse some distance
Sunscreen if there is an obstacle in the way.
Press and hold the front of the control
within two seconds of a bounce-back
event to override this function. While
bounce-back is active, the closing force
increases for each of the next three times
that you close the moonroof.
Venting the Moonroof

E138668
Press and release the front of the control
Press and release the rear of the control to vent the moonroof. Press and release
to open the sunscreen. the rear of the control to close the
moonroof.
Press and release the front of the control
to close the sunscreen. If it is open, the Note: When you vent the moonroof it will
moonroof will automatically close before rise to 1.57 in (4 cm) and then lower slightly.
the sunscreen closes. This is normal. You cannot stop the
moonroof in the higher position.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E138669
81

Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
E171213
A Information display
B Speedometer
C Engine coolant temperature gauge
D Fuel gauge
E Tachometer
Use the diagram to determine your

Information Display magnetic zone.
Compass (If Equipped)
Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
To calibrate and set the compass zone use
the information display menu. See
82

Instrument Cluster
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightly
3 2 1 15 when your vehicle is moving or when driving
on a slope.
4 14 Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
13 indicate approximately how much fuel is
in the fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuel
5 pump symbol shows the fuel filler door
12
side of your vehicle.
The needle will move toward full when you
refuel your vehicle. If the needle still points
E142800
6 7 8 9 1011 to empty after adding fuel, have your
vehicle repaired.
Odometer
After refueling the needle may not always
Located in the bottom of the information return to exactly the same position. This is
display, it registers the accumulated normal.
distance your vehicle has traveled. Note: It may take a short time for the
Outside Air Temperature needle to reach full after refueling and
driving. This is normal and may be due to
Shows the outside air temperature. the slope of pavement at the service station.
Trip Computer Note: The fuel pumped into the tank may
differ slightly from the fuel gauge. This is
See Trip Computer (page 90). normal and may be due to the slope of
pavement at the service station.
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
Note: If the service station nozzle shuts off
See General Information (page 87). before the tank is full, complete refueling
at a different pump.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge Low Fuel Level Reminder
WARNING Vehicles with Trip Computer

Never remove the coolant reservoir A low fuel level reminder displays and
cap while the engine is running or hot. sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
At normal operating temperature, the (40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
needle will remain in the center section. for all vehicle keys.
Note: Do not restart the engine until the
cause of overheating has been resolved. Vehicles without Trip Computer
If the needle enters the red section, the A low fuel level reminder displays and
engine is overheating. Stop the engine, sounds when the fuel gauge needle is at
switch the ignition off and determine the 1/16th.
cause once the engine has cooled down.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 219).
83

Instrument Cluster
Note: The low fuel warning and Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
distance-to-empty warning can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on It will illuminate when you switch
fuel economy conditions. This variation is this feature off or in conjunction
normal. E124823
with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 161). See
Information Messages (page 90).
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS Brake System
The following warning lamps and It will illuminate when you
indicators will alert you to a vehicle engage the parking brake with
E138644
condition that may become serious. Some the ignition on.
lamps will illuminate when you start your If it illuminates when you are driving, check
vehicle to make sure they work. If any that the parking brake is not engaged. If
lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, the parking brake is not engaged, this
refer to the respective system warning indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
lamp for further information. system malfunction. Have the system
Note: Some warning indicators appear in checked immediately by your authorized
the information display and function the dealer.
same as a warning lamp but do not display
WARNING
when you start your vehicle.
Driving your vehicle with the warning
Airbag - Front lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
If it fails to illuminate when you may occur. It will take you longer to stop
start your vehicle, continues to your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by
flash or remains on, it indicates your authorized dealer immediately. Driving
a malfunction. Have the system checked extended distances with the parking brake
by your authorized dealer. engaged can cause brake failure and the
risk of personal injury.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are Cruise Control (If Equipped)
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue It will illuminate when you switch
to have the normal braking system this feature on. See Using
(without ABS) unless the brake system
E71340 Cruise Control (page 160).
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked by your authorized dealer. Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right
Battery turn signal or the hazard warning
If it illuminates while driving, it flasher is turned on. If the
indicates a malfunction. Switch indicators stay on or flash faster, check for
off all unnecessary electrical a burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
equipment and have the system checked (page 227).
by your authorized dealer immediately.
84

Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Low Fuel Level

If it illuminates with the engine It will illuminate when the fuel
running or when you are driving, level is low or the fuel tank is
this indicates a malfunction. nearly empty. Refuel as soon as
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to possible.
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check Low Tire Pressure Warning
(page 218).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it It will illuminate when your tire
illuminates despite the level being correct. pressure is low. If the lamp
Have the system checked by your authorized remains on with the engine
dealer immediately. running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.
Fasten Safety Belt It will also illuminate momentarily when
you switch the ignition on to confirm the
It will illuminate and a chime will lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate
sound to remind you to fasten when you switch the ignition on, or begins
your safety belt. See Seatbelt to flash at any time, have the system
Reminder (page 32). checked by your authorized dealer.
Fog Lamps - Front (If Equipped) Parking Lamps

It will illuminate when you switch It will illuminate when you switch
the front fog lamps on. the parking lamps on.
High Beam Service Engine Soon

It will illuminate when you switch If the service engine soon
the high beam headlamps on. It indicator light stays illuminated
will flash when you use the after the engine is started, it
headlamp flasher. indicates that the On-Board Diagnostics
(OBD-II) system has detected a
Information (If Equipped) malfunction of the vehicle emissions
control system. Refer to On-Board
It will illuminate when a new Diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Fuel and
message is stored in the Refueling chapter for more information
information display. It will be red about having your vehicle serviced. See
or amber in color depending on the severity Emission Control System (page 134).
of the message and will remain on until the
cause of the message has been rectified. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
See Information Messages (page 90). occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
85

Instrument Cluster
WARNING AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND

Under engine misfire conditions, INDICATORS
excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic Key in Ignition Warning Chime
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
coverings or other vehicle components, Sounds when you open the driver's door
possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized and you have left the key in the ignition.
dealer service your vehicle immediately.
Engine On Warning Chime
The service engine soon indicator light A warning chime will sound when any door
illuminates when the ignition is first turned is opened if the vehicle exceeds a relatively
on prior to engine start to check the bulb low speed.
and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready
for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Normally, the service engine soon light will Sounds the horn twice when you exit the
stay on until the engine is cranked, then vehicle and the keyless vehicle is in RUN,
turn itself off if no malfunctions are indicating the vehicle is still on.
present. However, if after 15 seconds the
service engine soon light blinks eight times, Headlamps On Warning Chime
it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See Emission Control Sounds when you remove the key from the
System (page 134). ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
Traction and Stability Control on.
It will flash when the system is Parking Brake On Warning Chime

active. If it remains illuminated
E138639 or does not illuminate when you Sounds when you have left the parking
switch the ignition on, this indicates a brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
malfunction. During a malfunction the warning chime remains on after you have
system will switch off. Have the system released the parking brake, have the
checked by your authorized dealer system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. immediately.
Automatic Transmission Warning

Traction and Stability Control Off Chime
It will illuminate when you switch Sounds when you have not moved the
the system off. It will go out transmission selector lever to position P.
when you switch the system A message will be shown in the display.
back on or when you switch the ignition
off.
86

GENERAL INFORMATION • Press the up and down arrow buttons

to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
WARNING
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
Driving while distracted can result in sub-menu.
injury. We strongly recommend that • Press the left arrow button to exit a
you use extreme caution when using any menu.
device that may take your focus off the • Press and hold the left arrow button at
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe any time to return to the main menu
operation of your vehicle. We recommend display (escape button).
against the use of any hand-held device • Press the OK button to choose and
while driving and encourage the use of confirm settings or messages. The OK
voice-operated systems when possible. button may also be used to reset some
Make sure you are aware of all applicable Trip values.
electronic devices while driving. Menu Structure - Information
Display
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display All Vehicles
controls on the steering wheel. You can access the menu using the
Corresponding information is displayed in information display control.
the information display.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
Information Display Controls different or not at all if the items are
optional.
E138659
87

1
Trip 1 and 2
Distance to E
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
Inst Fuel Econ
Average Fuel Ford EcoMode
2 Anticipation
Speed
Average Speed
Digital Speedo
All Value - Distance to E, Trip Odometer, Instantaneous Fuel and Average Fuel
1
See Trip Computer (page 90).
2
See Eco Mode (page 166).
Settings
Seatbelt
Intelligent 4WD
MyKey Dist.
MyKey Info
System Check
Settings
Driver Assist Traction Ctrl On or Off
Blindspot On or Off
Cross Traffic On or Off
Lighting Rain Light On or Off
Dimming Auto or Manual
Hdlamp Delay Manual or xx Seconds
88

Settings
DRL On or Off
Display Navigation info On or Off
Language Choose your applicable setting
Distance Choose your applicable setting
Temperature Choose your applicable setting
Chimes Park Slot On or Off
Convenience Auto engine off On or Off
Compass Display On or Off
Remote Start Climate Control Heater – A/C / Auto or
Last Settings
Front Defrost / Auto or Off
Rear Defrost / Auto or Off
Duration (5, 10 or 15 minutes)
Quiet Start On/Off
Restore Default
System On or Off
Wipers Rain Sensing
MyKey Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey
Traction Ctrl Always On or User Selectable
Max Speed 80 MPH (130 km/h) or Off
Speed Warning 45 mph (75 km/h), 55 mph (90 km/h), 65 mph
(105 km/h) or Off
Volume Limiter On or Off
Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys
89

System Check All Value (If Equipped)

All active warnings will display first if Indicates all the respective remaining fuel,
applicable. The system check menu may distance, time and average fuel
appear different based upon equipment information.
options and current vehicle status. Use the
up/down arrow buttons to scroll through
the list. INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
TRIP COMPUTER and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages display or are available.
Resetting the Trip Computer Additionally, the information display may
Press and hold OK on the current screen abbreviate or shorten certain messages.
to reset the respective trip, distance, time
and average fuel information.
Distance to E
Indicates the approximate distance the
vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern may
cause the value to vary.
Trip Odometer
Registers the distance traveled of
individual journeys.
Trip Timer
Registers the time of individual journeys. E130248
Instantaneous Fuel (If Equipped) Press the OK button to acknowledge and

remove some messages from the
Shows your instantaneous fuel usage. information display. The information
display automatically removes other
Average Fuel messages after a short time.
Indicates the average fuel consumption You need to confirm certain messages
since the function was last reset. before you can access the menus.
Digital Speedo Message indicator (If Equipped)

Shows a digital display of your vehicle The message indicator
speed. illuminates to supplement some
messages. It is red or amber
depending on the severity of the message
and remains on until you or your authorized
dealer have fixed the vehicle concern.
90

A system specific symbol with a message messages.

indicator may supplement some
Airbag
Message Message Action

Indicator
Airbag fault Service now Amber Displays when the system requires service due
to a malfunction. Contact your authorized
dealer.
Alarm

Indicator
Alarm activated Check Amber Displays when the alarm has been triggered
Vehicle due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 66).
Alarm fault Service - Displays when the system requires service due
required to a malfunction. Contact your authorized
dealer.
Automatic Engine Shutdown

Indicator
Engine Shuts Off For - Displays when the engine has shut off to help
Fuel Economy increase fuel economy.
Engine Shuts Off in XX - Displays when the engine is getting ready to
Seconds OK to Override shut off. You can press OK on the left steering
wheel button to override the shut down.
91

Battery and Charging System

Indicator
Electrical system over- Red Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so

voltage Stop safely and switch off the ignition. Contact your
authorized dealer.
Battery low See manual Amber Displays to warn of a low battery condition.
Turn off all unneeded electrical accessories.
Contact your authorized dealer.
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System

Indicator
BLIS Low visibility See Amber Displayed when the blind spot information
manual system and cross traffic alert system sensors
are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 161).
BLIS: X sensor fault Amber Displayed when a fault with the system has
Service required occurred. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
BLIS not available Trailer Amber Displayed when the system is not available due
attached to trailer use. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 161).
Cross Traffic Vehicle Amber Displayed when the system detects a vehicle.
coming from X See Blind Spot Information System (page
161).
Cross Traffic Sensor Amber Displayed when the blind spot information
blocked See manual system and cross traffic alert system sensors
are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 161).
Cross Traffic fault Amber Displays when the system requires service due
Service required to a malfunction. Contact your authorized
dealer.
Cross Traffic disabled - Displayed when the system is not available due
Trailer attached to trailer use. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 161).
92

Doors

Indicator
X door open Red Displays when the door(s) listed is not

completely closed and the vehicle is moving.
- Displays when the door(s) listed is not
completely closed.
Liftgate ajar Red Displays when the luggage compartment is not
completely closed and the vehicle is moving.
- Displays when the luggage compartment is not
completely closed.
Hood open Red Displays when the hood is not completely
closed and the vehicle is moving.
- Displays when the hood is not completely
closed.
Engine

Indicator
Engine fault Service now Amber Engine service is required. Contact your
authorized dealer.
High engine temperature Red Displays when the engine temperature is too
Stop safely high. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and allow
to engine to cool. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized dealer. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 219).
Power reduced to lower - Displays when the engine has reduced power
temperature in order to help reduce high coolant temper-
ature.
93

Hill Start Assist

Indicator
Hill start assist not avail- Amber Displays when hill start assist is not available.
able Contact your authorized dealer.
Keyless Vehicle

Indicator
Ford KeyFree Key inside Amber Displays to remind you that the key is in the
vehicle trunk. See Keyless Starting (page 123).
Ford KeyFree No key - Displayed if the key is not detected by the
detected system. See Keyless Starting (page 123).
Switch ign. off Press Red Displayed as a reminder to turn off the vehicle.
ENGINE Start/Stop See Keyless Starting (page 123).
button
Press brake to start - Displayed as a reminder to press the brake
while starting the vehicle.
Ford KeyFree Key not Red Displayed when a valid key is not detected
inside car within the vehicle. See Keyless Starting (page
123).
Key Battery low Replace - Displays when the key battery is low. Change
soon the battery as soon as possible. See Remote
Control (page 45).
94

Lighting

Indicator
Brake lamp Bulb fault - Displays when the brake lamp bulb has burned
out. Contact your authorized dealer.
Low beam Bulb fault - Displays when the low beam headlamp bulb
has burned out. Contact your authorized dealer.
Headlamp fault Service Amber Displays when an electrical system problem
required occurs with the headlamp system. Contact your
authorized dealer.
Maintenance

Indicator
Engine oil change due - Displays when the engine oil life is depleted and
requires a change. See Engine Oil Check
(page 218).
Brake fluid level low Red Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the
Service now brake system should be inspected immediately.
See Brake Fluid Check (page 222).
MyKey

Indicator
MyKey active Drive - Displays when MyKey is active.

Safely
MyKey Speed Limited to - Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey
XX MPH/km/h is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.
MyKey Vehicle Near Top Amber Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey
Speed speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is
approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
MyKey Vehicle at Top Amber Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey
Speed speed limit is reached.
95


Indicator
MyKey Check Speed - Displays when MyKey is active.

Drive Safely
MyKey Buckle Up to - Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-
Unmute Audio Minder is activated.
MyKey Park aid cannot - Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is
be deactivated activated.
Key is Already a MyKey - Displays when trying to create a MyKey with a
key already designated as a MyKey.
Hold key next to symbol - Displays when programming a MyKey.
on steering column
MyKey ESC cannot be - Displays when programming a MyKey.
deactivated
Park Aid

Indicator
Parking aid malfunction Amber Displays when the system has detected a
Service required condition that requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation
(page 151).
Park Brake

Indicator
Park brake applied Red Displays when the parking brake is set, the
engine is running and the vehicle is driven more
than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on
after the parking brake is released, contact your
authorized dealer.
96

Power Steering

Indicator
Steering loss Stop safely Red The power steering system is not working. Stop
the vehicle a safe place. Contact your author-
ized dealer.
Steering assist fault Amber The power steering system is not working. Stop
Service required the vehicle a safe place. Contact your author-
ized dealer.
Steering fault Service Amber The power steering system has detected a
now condition within the power steering system or
passive entry or passive start system requires
service. Contact your authorized dealer.
Starting System

Indicator
Press brake to start - Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder

to apply the brake.
Cranking time exceeded - Displays when the vehicle fails to start.
Transmission and Four-Wheel Drive

Indicator
Transmission fault - See your authorized dealer.

Service now
Transmission overtem- Amber The transmission is overheating and needs to
perature Stop safely cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it’s
possible.
Transmission Service Amber See your authorized dealer.
required
Transmission Hot Stop - Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool
or Speed Up or speed up.
97


Indicator
Transmission Hot Wait - Transmission is hot. Wait as needed to let it

... cool.
4WD fault Service Amber The system is not functioning correctly and
required defaulted to front-wheel drive. See your
authorized dealer. See Using Four-Wheel
Drive (page 140).
4WD Off Amber Displays when the system disables automatic-
ally and enters front-wheel drive only mode to
protect driveline components. See Using Four-
Wheel Drive (page 140).
4WD temporarily Amber The system has overheated and defaulted to
disabled front-wheel drive. See Using Four-Wheel
Drive (page 140).
4WD restored - Displays when system operation has been
restored. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page
140).
Transmission not in Park - Displays as a reminder to shift into park.
Select P
Press brake to unlock - Displays to request the operator to apply the
gearshift lever brake as needed by the transmission.
Gearshift lever unlocked - Displays when the transmission shift lever is
unlocked and free to select gears.
98

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Indicator
Low Tire Pressure Amber Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle
have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 259).
Tire Pressure Monitor Amber Displays when the tire pressure monitoring
Fault system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monit-
oring System (page 259).
Tire Pressure Sensor Amber Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is
Fault malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For
more information on how the system operates
under these conditions, see See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 259). If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Traction Control

Indicator
Traction control off - Displays when the traction control system has
been switched off. See Using Traction
Control (page 148).
Trailer

Indicator
Trailer Sway Reduce - Displays when the trailer sway control has
Speed detected a trailer sway. See Trailer Sway
Control (page 179).
99

Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
A B C D E
E141421
A Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
B Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the
time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your
vehicle.
C Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
D A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your
vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
E Air distribution control: Adjust to turn airflow from the windshield, instrument
panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through the following
combinations: windshield, windshield/floor, panel, panel/floor, and floor.
100

Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
E141422
A AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired

temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside
or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more than two seconds.
B Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
C Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
D MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through the
windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan automatically
adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear
the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also
automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
E MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
F Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the
time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your
vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
101

Climate Control
G Air distribution control: Adjust to turn airflow from the windshield, instrument
panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through the following
combinations: windshield, windshield/floor, panel, panel/floor, and floor.
H A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your
vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
Dual Zone Temperature Control

Temperature Control
Select a temperature for the passenger’s
side using the rotary control on the
passenger’s side. Single zone temperature
control automatically switches off. The
temperature on the driver’s side remains
unchanged. You can now adjust the
driver's side and passenger's side
temperatures independently. The display
shows the temperature settings for each
side.
Switching Back to Single Zone
E133115 Temperature Control
You can set the temperature between 61°F Press and hold the AUTO button. The
(16°C) and 86°F (30°C) in steps of 1°F passenger side temperature is adjusted to
(0.5°C). In position LO, 59°F (15°C), the the driver side temperature setting.
system switches to permanent cooling. In
position HI, 86°F (30°C), the system
switches to permanent heating. HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
Single Zone Temperature Control
In this mode, the climate control system General Hints
links the temperature settings for both the Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
driver's side and passenger's side. If you cause the windows to fog up.
adjust the setting using the rotary control
on the driver’s side, the system adjusts the Note: You may feel a small amount of air
temperature to the same setting on the from the floor air vents regardless of the air
passenger’s side. distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
102

Climate Control
Note: Do not place objects under the front Automatic Climate Control
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats. Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from not necessary. The system automatically
the air intake area at the base of the adjusts to heat or cool the cabin to your
windshield. selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
Manual Climate Control instrument panel and side air vents should
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield be fully open.
during humid weather, adjust the air Note: At low ambient temperatures with
distribution control to the windshield air AUTO selected, the system directs airflow
vents position. Increase the temperature to the windshield and side window vents
and fan speed to improve clearing, if and fan may run at a slow speed until the
required. engine warms up.
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest Press the high fan speed button.
speed setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the Adjust the temperature control to the
highest setting. highest setting.
3 Adjust the air distribution control to the Press the floor button to distribute air to
floor air vents position. the floor air vents.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1 Adjust the fan speed to the second Press the AUTO button.
speed setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the Set the temperature to 72°F (22°C).
midway point of the hot settings.
3 Adjust the air distribution control to the
floor and windshield air vents position.
103

Climate Control
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest Press the MAX A/C button.
speed setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
instrument panel air vents position.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1 Adjust the fan speed to the second Press the AUTO button.
speed setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the Set the temperature to 72°F (22°C).
midway point of the cold settings.
instrument panel air vents position.
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods during Extreme High Ambient

Temperatures
1 Apply the parking brake. Apply the parking brake.

2 Move the transmission selector lever to Move the transmission selector lever to
position P. position P.
3 Adjust the temperature control to the Press the MAX A/C button.
MAX A/C position.
4 Adjust the fan speed to the lowest speed
setting.
104

Climate Control
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
1 Adjust the air distribution control to the Press the windshield defrosting and
instrument panel and floor air vents defogging button.
positions.
2 Press the A/C button. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3 Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
4 Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
5 Direct the instrument panel side air vents
toward the side windows.
6 Close the center instrument panel vents.
Maximum Cooling Performance in Press the button to clear the heated rear
Instrument Panel or Instrument window of thin ice and fog. The heated rear
window will automatically turn off after a
Panel and Footwell Positions
short period of time. Start the engine
1. Adjust the temperature control to the before you switch the heated rear window
lowest setting. on.
2. Press the A/C and recirculated air Do not use razor blades or other sharp
buttons. objects to clean or remove decals from the
3. Adjust the fan speed to the highest inside of the heated rear window. The
setting initially and then adjust it to suit vehicle warranty does not cover damage
the desired comfort level. caused to the heated rear window grid
lines.
HEATED WINDOWS AND Heated Exterior Mirror

MIRRORS When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
Heated Rear Window automatically turn on.
Note: Make sure the engine is running Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
before operating the heated windows. with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
The heated rear window button
E72507
is below the climate control unit. Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
105

Climate Control
CABIN AIR FILTER Automatic Settings

You can set the climate control to operate
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
in AUTO mode through the information
filter, which gives you and your passengers
display setting: Remote Start > Climate
the following benefits:
Control > Heater-A/C > Auto. The climate
• It improves your driving comfort by control system automatically sets the
reducing particle concentration. interior temperature to 72°F (22°C).
• It improves the interior compartment In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
cleanliness. (22°C). Cooled seats are set to high (if
• It protects the climate control available, and selected to AUTO in the
components from particle deposits. information display).
Your cabin air filter is located under the In moderate weather, the system either
instrument panel in the passenger footwell heats or cools (based on previous
area. settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated or cooled seats do not
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
automatically turn on.
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
the system without a filter in place could (22°C). The rear defroster and heated
result in degradation or damage to the mirrors automatically turn on.
system.
Last Settings
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Maintenance (page 213). You can set the climate control to operate
For additional cabin air filter information, using the last climate control settings
or to replace the filter, see an authorized through the information display setting:
dealer. Remote Start > Climate Control >
Heater–A/C > Last Settings. The climate
control system automatically uses the
REMOTE START (If Equipped) settings last selected before you turned
off the vehicle.
The climate control system adjusts the
cabin temperature during remote start. Heated and Cooled Devices
You cannot adjust the system during The climate control system controls other
remote start operation. Switch on the heated and cooled devices inside the
ignition to return the system to its previous vehicle. You can switch these devices on
settings. You can now make adjustments. (if available, and selected to AUTO in the
You need to switch on certain information displays) during remote start.
vehicle-dependent features, such as: Heated devices typically switch on during
• Heated seats. cold weather, and cooled devices during
hot weather.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
You can adjust the settings using the
information display controls. See
106

Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT We recommend that you follow these

guidelines:
POSITION
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or • Do not recline the seatback more than
with the seatback reclined too far 30 degrees.
can take weight off the seat cushion • Adjust the head restraint so that the
and affect the decision of the passenger top of it is level with the top of your
sensing system, resulting in serious injury head and as far forward as possible.
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit Make sure that you remain
upright against your seat back, with your comfortable.
feet on the floor. • Keep sufficient distance between
Do not recline the seatback as this yourself and the steering wheel. We
can cause the occupant to slide recommend a minimum of 10 in
under the safety belt, resulting in (25 cm) between your breastbone and
serious injury in the event of a crash. the airbag cover.
Do not place objects higher than the • Hold the steering wheel with your arms
seatback to reduce the risk of serious slightly bent.
injury in the event of a crash or during • Bend your legs slightly so that you can
heavy braking. press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
E68595
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
When you use them properly, the seat, the head restraint when your vehicle is
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will moving.
provide optimum protection in the event The head restraint is a safety device.
of a crash. Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. An improperly
adjusted head restraint may not
adequately protect an occupant during an
impact from the rear.
107

Seats
WARNINGS The head restraints consist of:

Install the head restraint properly to A An energy absorbing head
help minimize the risk of neck injury restraint.
in the event of a crash.
B Two steel stems.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright C Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
driving position before adjusting the head button.
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that D Guide sleeve unlock and remove
the top of it is level with the top of your head button.
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are E Fold button
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position. Rear center head restraint
Front seat head restraint
E187325
E138642 The rear center head restraint consists of:

Rear seat outboard head restraints A An energy absorbing head
restraint.
B Two steel stems.
C Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
Adjusting the Head Restraint

Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
E138643 Lowering the Head Restraint

1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
108

Seats
Removing the Head Restraint MANUAL SEATS

1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position. WARNING
2. Press and hold buttons C and D. Do not adjust the driver seat or
3. Pull the head restraint up. seatback when your vehicle is
moving.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves Moving the Seat Backward and
and push the head restraint down until it Forward
locks.
Folding the Head Restraint

1. Press and hold button E.
2. Pull it back up to reset.
Tilting Head Restraints

The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E163870
WARNING
Rock the seat backward and forward
after releasing the lever to make sure
that it is fully engaged.
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright

driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
109

Seats
Adjusting the Height of the Driver WARNING

Seat
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position. Pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched after returning the seatback to its
original position. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous if you stop suddenly or
have a crash.
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver's seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback
E163871 while your vehicle is in motion may cause
loss of control of your vehicle.
Recline Adjustment Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
E163872
110

Seats
E138647
111

Seats
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
E142554
Saving a PreSet Position

2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to
your desired position.
E138648
3. Press and hold the desired memory
button until you hear a single tone.
MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
Recalling a Pre-Set Position
WARNINGS Press and release the memory button
Before activating the seat memory, associated with your desired driving
make sure that the area immediately position. The seat and mirrors will move to
surrounding the seat is clear of the position stored for that preset.
obstructions and that all occupants are Note: Pressing any driver seat control, any
clear of moving parts. of the memory buttons or any mirror control
Do not use the memory function switch will stop seat movement during a
when your vehicle is moving. recall. You cannot use the seat memory
recall while the vehicle is moving.
This feature will automatically recall the
position of the driver seat and power
mirrors. The memory control is located on
the driver door. You can save up to three
memory position presets.
112

Seats
REAR SEATS HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
E155554 the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
Folding the Seatback engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
With the seat empty, pull the lever up to
fold the seatback forward. You may need
to fold the outboard head restraints and
lower the center head restraint first.
Unfolding the Seatback

Pull the seatback upward to unfold the
seatback.
Recline Adjustment (If Equipped)

With the seat occupied, pull the lever up
to recline the seatback.
E138653
Adjust the control to the desired heat

setting.
113

Seats
REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped)
E138656
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest

and cupholder.
114

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
HomeLink Wireless Control

System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage. E142657
Do not use the system with any The universal garage door opener replaces
garage door opener that does not the common hand-held garage door
have the safety stop and reverse opener with a three-button transmitter
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety that is integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982). The system includes two primary features,
A garage door opener which cannot detect a garage door opener and a platform for
an object, signaling the door to stop and remote activation of devices within the
reverse, does not meet current federal home. As well as being programmed for
safety standards. Using a garage door garage doors, the system transmitter can
opener without these features increases be programmed to operate entry gate
the risk of serious injury or death. operators, security systems, entry door
locks and home or office lighting.
Note: Make sure you keep the original Additional system information can be
remote control transmitter for use in other found online at www.homelink.com,
vehicles as well as for future system www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
programming. by calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you In-Vehicle Programming
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function This process is to program your hand-held
Button Codes. transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of Note: The programming steps below
the three devices after it has been initially assume you will be programming HomeLink
programmed, you must first erase the that was not previously programmed.
current settings. See Erasing the Function Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
Button Codes. transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
115

To program additional buttons, repeat

Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door

E142658 Opener Motor
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
garage, turn your ignition to the on unit and you may need to remove the cover
position, but do not start your vehicle. or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away
from the HomeLink button you want
to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously,
press and hold the desired HomeLink
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. DO NOT release either one until
the HomeLink indicator light flashes E142659
slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both 1. Press the learn button on the garage
buttons may be released. The rapid door opener motor and then you have
flashing indicates successful training. 30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have 2. Return to your vehicle.
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light. E142658
If the indicator light stays on, the 3. Press and hold the function button you
programming is complete. No further want to program for 2 seconds, then
action is needed. release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
you may need to repeat this sequence
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
a third time.
the HomeLink button is not programmed
yet. See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
116

Gate Operator / Canadian 1. Press and hold the outer two function
Programming buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
Canadian radio-frequency laws require indicator lights above the buttons flash
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) rapidly.
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for 2. When the indicator lights flash, release
HomeLink to pick up the signal during the buttons. The codes for all buttons
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, are erased.
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
Reprogramming a Single Button
“time-out” in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener To program a device to a previously trained
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the button, follow these steps:
device during the “cycling” process to 1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
prevent possible overheating. NOT release the button.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button 2. The indicator light will begin to flash
while you press and release, every two after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
seconds, your hand-held transmitter button, follow Step 1 in the
until the HomeLink indicator light Programming section.
changes from a slow to a rapidly
For questions or comments, contact
blinking light.
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
2. Release both the HomeLink and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
hand-held transmitter buttons. 1-800-355-3515.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming. Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons. must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode.
E142660
117

1. Press and hold the previously

programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.
The indicator light will change from red
to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the
indicator light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie

A B Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
E142661 Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
A. Red indicator light
B. Green indicator light
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on

the hand-held transmitter for 10
seconds. The indicator light will change
from green to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches E142662
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program. 1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until
4. Press and hold both the programmed
both blue indicator lights turn on.
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want 2. Release the program button. Only the
to program. The indicator light on the smaller round indicator light should be
visor will flash rapidly when the on.
programming is successful. 3. Press and release the program button.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit The larger purple indicator light will
for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not flash.
program within 30 seconds the Genie Note: The next two steps must be
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If completed in 30 seconds.
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the 4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
indicator light turns off before pressing the 2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
button again. programmed button. Both indicator
lights on the garage door opener motor
Once HomeLink has been programmed unit should now flash purple.
successfully, the Genie transmitter must
be changed out of program mode. To do
this:
118

5. Press and hold the previously

programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device

To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and
the indicator light should blink slowly to
indicate the device is in train mode when
any of the three HomeLink buttons are
pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada

Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
119

12 Volt DC Power Point Locations

WARNINGS Power points may be in the following
Do not plug optional electrical locations:
accessories into the cigar lighter • On the front of the center console.
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar • Inside the center console.
lighter can cause damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire • On the rear of the center console.
or serious injury. • Inside the luggage compartment.
Do not use a power point for 110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
operating a cigar lighter. Incorrect
use of the power points can cause WARNING
damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious Do not keep electrical devices
injury. plugged in the power point whenever
the device is not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you power point, since it will defeat the safety
can use the socket to power 12 volt protection design. Doing so may cause the
appliances with a maximum current rating power point to overload due to powering
of 15 amps. multiple devices that can reach beyond
If the power supply does not work after you the 150 watt load limit and could result in
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition fire or serious injury.
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the Note: The power point will turn off when
accessory plug. the ignition is switched off or the battery
Note: Do not use the power point over the voltage drops below 11 volts.
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
will damage the power point and blow the
fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of E143941
charge:
Use the power point for powering electric
• Do not use the power point longer than devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
necessary when the vehicle is not on the rear of the center console.
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
120

When the indicator light on the power point

is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
121

Storage Compartments
CENTER CONSOLE Press near the rear edge of the door to

open it.
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
A B
C
E142433
A Cup holder.
B Storage compartment with
auxiliary power point, auxiliary
input jack, USB port and media
hub.
C Auxiliary power point.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E131605
122

Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)

WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up E72128
the engine compartment and exhaust

0 (off) - The ignition is off.
system, creating the risk of fire.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
Do not start the engine in a closed
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
garage or in other enclosed areas.
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
battery to lose charge.
open the garage door before you start the
engine. I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
while the engine is not running.
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if position for too long. This could cause your
you smell exhaust fumes. vehicle battery to lose charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits are
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle operational and the warning lamps and
may exhibit some unusual driving indicators illuminate.
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
III (start) - cranks the engine.
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped)
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period. Note: The keyless starting system may not
The powertrain control system meets all function if the key is close to metal objects
Canadian interference-causing equipment or electronic devices such as cellular phones
standard requirements regulating the Note: A valid key must be located inside
impulse electrical field or radio noise. your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
When you start the engine, avoid pressing start the engine.
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
123

Ignition Modes Before starting the engine check the

following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
• Turn the ignition key to position II. If
your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, see the following instructions.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E142555
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
The keyless starting system has three
modes: 2. Turn the key to position III to start the
engine. Release the key when the
Off: Turns the ignition off. engine starts.
• Without applying the brake pedal, Note: The engine may continue cranking
press and release the button once for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
when the engine is running but the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
vehicle is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational Vehicles with Keyless Start
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
• Without applying the brake pedal, 1. Fully press the brake pedal.
press and release the button once. 2. Press the button.
Start: Starts the engine. The system does not function if:
• Press the brake pedal, and then press • The key frequencies are jammed.
and hold the button until the engine • The key battery has no charge.
starts.
If you are unable to start the engine, do the
following:
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases, this helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
124

3-button remote Within 20 seconds of switching the engine

off, press the brake pedal and press the
button. After 20 seconds have expired, you
can no longer restart the engine without
the key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains
running until you press the button, even if
the system does not detect a valid key. If
you open and close a door while the engine
is running, the system searches for a valid
key. You cannot restart the engine if the
system does not detect a valid key within
20 seconds.
Failure to Start
E145988 If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
5-button remote procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown

If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period. The ignition also
E142874 turns off in order to save battery power.
1. Hold the key next to the symbol on the Before the engine shuts down, a message
steering column. appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down from 30 seconds.
2. With the key in this position, you can If you do not intervene within 30 seconds,
use the start button to switch the the engine shuts down. Another message
ignition on and start your vehicle. appears in the information display to
Fast Restart inform you that the engine has shut down
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as
The fast restart feature allows you to you normally do.
restart the engine within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if a valid key is not Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
present. Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic engine shutdown feature.
When you switch it off temporarily, it turns
on at the next ignition cycle.
125

You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset Stopping the Engine When Your
the timer, at any point before the Vehicle is Moving
30-second countdown has expired by
doing any of the following: WARNING
• You can reset the timer by interacting Switching off the engine when the
with your vehicle (such as pressing the vehicle is still moving will result in a
brake pedal or accelerator pedal). loss of brake and steering assistance.
• You can temporarily switch off the The steering will not lock, but higher effort
shutdown feature any time the ignition will be required. When the ignition is
is on (for the current ignition cycle switched off, some electrical circuits,
only). Use the information display to including air bags, warning lamps and
do so. See Information Displays indicators may also be off. If the ignition
(page 87). was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
• During the countdown before engine
shutdown, you are prompted to press
OK or RESET (depending on your type Vehicles with an Ignition Key
of information display) to temporarily 1. Move the transmission selector lever
switch the feature off (for the current to position N and use the brakes to
ignition cycle only). bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
Stopping the Engine When Your 2. When your vehicle has stopped, move
Vehicle is Stationary the transmission selector lever to
position P and turn the key to position
Vehicles with an Ignition Key 0.
1. Move the transmission selector lever 3. Apply the parking brake.
to position P.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
2. Turn the key to position 0.
3. Apply the parking brake. 1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position N and use the brakes to
Vehicles with Keyless Start bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, move
1. Move the transmission selector lever
the transmission selector lever to
to position P.
position P.
2. Press the button once.
3. Press and hold the button for one
3. Apply the parking brake. second, or press it three times within
Note: This switches off the ignition, all two seconds.
electrical circuits, warning lamps and 4. Apply the parking brake.
indicators.
126

Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes The heater acts as a starting aid by

warming the engine coolant. This allows
WARNING the climate control system to respond
If you smell exhaust fumes inside quickly. The equipment includes a heater
your vehicle, have your vehicle element (installed in the engine block) and
checked by your authorized dealer a wire harness. You can connect the
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if system to a grounded 120-volt AC
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon electrical source.
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. We recommend that you do the following
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous for a safe and correct operation:
effects. • Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Important Ventilating Information Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
If you stop your vehicle and the leave the (CSA). This extension cord must be
engine idling for long periods of time, we suitable for use outdoors, in cold
recommend that you do one of the temperatures, and be clearly marked
following: Suitable for Use with Outdoor
• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 Appliances. Do not use an indoor
centimeters) extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
• Set your climate control to outside air.
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If possible.
Equipped) • Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
WARNINGS extension cord plug and heater cord
Failure to follow engine block heater plug connections are free and clear of
instructions could result in property water. This could cause an electric
damage or serious personal injury. shock or fire.
Do not use your heater with • Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
ungrounded electrical systems or clean area, clear of combustibles.
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk • Make sure the heater, heater cord and
of electrical shock. extension cord are firmly connected.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow • Check for heat anywhere in the
it to drop under its own weight when electrical hookup once the system has
using the engine block heater. This been operating for approximately 30
could damage the power cable and may minutes.
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when

outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
127

• Make sure the system is unplugged and

properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater

Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
128

Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Automotive fuels can be harmful or

fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
WARNINGS
swallowed can cause death or
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
pressure in an overfilled tank may call a physician immediately, even if no
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray symptoms are immediately apparent.
and fire. The toxic effects of fuel may not be
The fuel system may be under visible for hours.
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
spray out, which could cause serious In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
personal injury. breathing of fuel vapor can cause
Fuels can cause serious injury or serious illness and permanent injury.
death if misused or mishandled. • Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump contact lenses (if worn), flush with
nozzle can produce static electricity. water for 15 minutes and seek medical
This can cause a fire if you are filling attention. Failure to seek proper
an ungrounded fuel container. medical attention could lead to
Fuel may contain benzene, which is permanent injury.
a cancer-causing agent. • Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
When refueling always shut the through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
engine off and never allow sparks or the skin, clothing or both, promptly
open flames near the fuel tank filler remove contaminated clothing and
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone wash skin thoroughly with soap and
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely water. Repeated or prolonged skin
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
inhaling excess fumes. skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Observe the following guidelines when Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
handling automotive fuel: for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors could cause
• Extinguish all smoking materials and an adverse reaction, serious personal
any open flames before refueling your injury or sickness. If fuel is splashed on
vehicle. the skin, wash the affected areas
• Always turn off the vehicle before immediately with plenty of soap and
refueling. water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience any adverse reactions.
129

Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY • Fuels containing the octane booster

additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
Choosing the Right Fuel manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
E161513
control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
rating of 87. Some fuel stations offer fuels the recommended octane rating, contact
posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
an octane rating below 87, particularly in damage.
high altitude areas. We do not recommend
fuels with an octane rating below 87.
For vehicles with EcoBoost engines, to FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
provide improved performance, we LOCATION
recommend premium fuel for severe duty
usage such as trailer tow. The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those Running out of fuel can cause damage not
recommended can impair the emission covered by the vehicle Warranty.
control system and cause a loss of vehicle If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
performance. • Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
Do not use: to restart the engine. If your vehicle is
• Diesel fuel. out of fuel and on a steep slope, more
fuel may be required.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• You may need to switch the ignition
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol from off to on several times after
or E85 fuel. refueling to allow the fuel system to
• Fuels containing methanol. pump the fuel from the tank to the
• Fuels containing metallic-based engine. When restarting, cranking time
additives, including manganese-based takes a few seconds longer than
compounds. normal.
130

Fuel and Refueling
Filling a Portable Fuel Container 1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages and remove the fuel tank
Use the following guidelines to avoid filler cap.
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container: Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a
fuel tank filler cap.
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the 2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the
container on the ground when filling it. fuel tank filler pipe opening.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel

Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel system filler neck. This E157452
may damage the fuel system filler neck or
its seal and cause fuel to run onto the 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
ground. container.
Do not try to pry open or push open 4. Remove the plastic funnel from the
the capless fuel system with foreign fuel tank filler pipe opening.
objects. This could damage the fuel 5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and
system and its seal and cause injury to you close the fuel tank filler door.
or others.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it
Do not dispose of fuel in the back in your vehicle or properly dispose
household refuse or the public of it.
sewage system. Use an authorized Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
waste disposal facility. an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the plastic funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler REFUELING
Funnel Location (page 130).
WARNINGS
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they will not work with the capless fuel Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
system and can damage it. fire can cause severe injuries.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from Read and follow all the instructions
a fuel container, do the following: on the pump island.
131

Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System

When refueling always shut the
WARNING
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler The fuel system may be under
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
inhaling excess fumes. spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle. This is When fueling your vehicle:
against the law in some places. 1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
Keep children away from the fuel into park (P) and switch the ignition
pump; never let children pump fuel. off.
Wait at least 10 seconds before 2. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
removing the fuel pump nozzle to it engages.
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
Stop refueling when the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
E156032
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can 3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
produce a spark, when filling an first notch on the nozzle. Hold handle
ungrounded fuel container: higher during insertion for easier
• Place approved fuel container on the access. Leave the fuel pump nozzle
ground. fully inserted until you are done
pumping.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
the vehicle (including the cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
• Do not use a device that would hold
the fuel pump handle in the fill position.
132

Fuel and Refueling
If this action corrects the problem, the

message may not reset immediately. It
may take several driving cycles for the
message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after 4 or
more hours with the engine off) followed
by city or highway driving. Continuing to
drive with the message on may cause the
service engine soon lamp to turn on as
well.
E154765 FUEL CONSUMPTION

4. Remove the fuel filler nozzle and fully Note: The amount of usable fuel in the
close the fuel tank filler door. empty reserve varies and should not be
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if relied upon to increase driving range. When
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge
tank. The fill pipe is equipped with a drain indicates empty, you might not be able to
hole. Excess fuel due to overfill may drain refuel the full amount of the advertised
through the drain hole and drip onto the capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
ground. reserve still present in the tank.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
a service engine warning lamp may appear remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
on the instrument cluster. indicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel for
driving. The usable capacity of the fuel
At the next opportunity, do the following:
tank is the amount of fuel that can be put
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely into the tank after the gauge indicates
possible and shift the transmission into empty. The advertised capacity is the total
park (P). fuel tank size – it is the combined usable
2. Switch the ignition off. capacity plus the empty reserve.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove Filling the Tank
any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening. For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the
fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle • Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
several times to allow the inlet to close inaccurate reading results if the engine
properly. This will dislodge any debris is left running.
preventing the inlet from sealing. • Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
133

Fuel and Refueling
Calculating Fuel Economy WARNINGS

Do not measure fuel economy during the Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of harmful and potentially lethal fumes
driving (this is your engine’s break-in into the passenger compartment. If
period); a more accurate measurement is you smell exhaust fumes inside your
obtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
(3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also, vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel smell exhaust fumes.
gauge readings are not accurate ways to
measure fuel economy. Your vehicle is equipped with various
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record emission control components and a
the initial odometer reading. catalytic converter that will enable your
vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the emission standards. To make sure that the
amount of fuel added. catalytic converter and other emission
3. After at least three to five tank fill ups, control components continue to work
fill the fuel tank and record the current properly:
odometer reading. • Use only the specified fuel listed.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading • Avoid running out of fuel.
from the current odometer reading.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing vehicle is moving, especially at high
miles traveled by gallons used (For speeds.
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then
• Have the items listed in scheduled
divide by kilometers traveled).
maintenance information performed
Keep a record for at least one month and according to the specified schedule.
record the type of driving (city or highway).
The scheduled maintenance items listed
This provides an accurate estimate of the
in scheduled maintenance information are
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
essential to the life and performance of
driving conditions. Additionally, keeping
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
records during summer and winter show
See Scheduled Maintenance (page 344).
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
fuel economy. or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of
components affecting emission control,
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM such non-Ford parts should be the
equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company
WARNINGS parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle Illumination of the service engine soon
in dry grass or other dry ground cover. indicator, charging system warning light or
The emission system heats up the the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
engine compartment and exhaust system, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
which can start a fire. power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
134

Fuel and Refueling
An improperly operating or damaged • the fuel fill inlet may not have closed
exhaust system may allow exhaust to properly. See Refueling (page 131).
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or • driving through deep water—the
improperly operating exhaust system electrical system may be wet.
inspected and repaired immediately.
You can correct these temporary
Do not make any unauthorized changes to malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
owners and anyone who manufactures, fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades out. After three driving cycles without these
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles or any other temporary malfunctions
are not permitted to intentionally remove present, the service engine soon indicator
an emission control device or prevent it should stay off the next time you start the
from working. Information about your engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle engine startup followed by mixed
Emission Control Information Decal city/highway driving. No additional vehicle
located on or near the engine. This decal service is required.
also lists engine displacement
If the service engine soon indicator remains
Please consult your warranty information on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
for complete details. available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) not have symptoms that are apparent,
Your vehicle has a computer known as the continued driving with the service engine
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that soon indicator on can result in increased
monitors the engine’s emission control emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
system. The system protects the engine and transmission smoothness, and
environment by making sure that your lead to more costly repairs.
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system Readiness for
also assists a service technician in properly Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
servicing your vehicle. Testing
When the service engine soon Some state/provincial and local
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II governments may have
system has detected a Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may to inspect the emission control equipment
cause the service engine soon indicator to on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
illuminate. inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
If the service engine soon
• the vehicle has run out of fuel—the indicator is on or the bulb does
engine may misfire or run poorly not work, you may need to have
• poor fuel quality or water in the the vehicle serviced. See On-Board
fuel—the engine may misfire or run Diagnostics (OBD-II).
poorly
135

Fuel and Refueling
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if

the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, your vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for
I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
may need to perform the following driving
cycle consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
Drive on an expressway or highway for a
steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours without starting the engine. Then,
start the engine and complete the above
driving cycle. The engine must warm up to
its normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the engine until the
above driving cycle is complete. If the
vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you
will have to repeat the above driving cycle.
136

Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Park (P)

This position locks the transmission and
WARNINGS prevents the wheels from turning.
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the gearshift is Reverse (R)
latched in park (P). Turn the ignition With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
to the off position and remove the key vehicle will move backward. Always come
whenever you leave your vehicle. to a complete stop before shifting into and
Do not apply the brake pedal and out of reverse (R).
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously Neutral (N)
for more than three seconds will limit With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
engine rpm, which may result in difficulty vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead Hold the brake pedal down while in this
to serious injury. position.
Understanding the Positions of Drive (D)

Your Automatic Transmission Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
Putting your vehicle in gear: the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
1. Fully press down the brake pedal. downshifts through gears one through six.
2. Press and hold the button on the front Sport (S)
of the gearshift lever.
3. Move the gearshift lever into the Moving the gearshift lever to sport (S):
desired gear. • Provides additional grade (engine)
4. Release the button and your braking and extends lower gear
transmission will remain in the selected operation to enhance performance for
gear. uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This will increase
engine RPM during engine braking.
• Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
• Gears are selected more quickly and
at higher engine speeds.
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission
Your SelectShift automatic transmission
E142629 gives you the ability to manually change
gears.
137

Transmission
To use SelectShift, move the gearshift WARNINGS

lever into sport (S). Use the +/- buttons When doing this procedure, you will
on the side of your gearshift lever to be taking the vehicle out of park
manually change gears. which means the vehicle can roll
• Press the (+) button to upshift. freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
• Press the (-) button to downshift. movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
Note: After you have assumed manual wheel chocks if appropriate.
control with SelectShift your vehicle will
remain in this mode until you return the If the parking brake is fully released,
gearshift lever from sport (S), back to drive but the brake warning lamp remains
(D). illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds dealer.
according to the following chart:
Use the brake shift interlock lever to move
Upshifts when accelerating (recom- the gearshift lever from the park position
mended for best fuel economy) in the event of an electrical malfunction or
Shift from: if your vehicle has a dead battery.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
1-2 15 mph (24 km/h) ignition off before performing this
2-3 25 mph (40 km/h) procedure.
1. Insert a screwdriver (or similar tool)
3-4 40 mph (64 km/h) between the shifter bezel and the top
4-5 45 mph (72 km/h) finish panel.
2. Use the tool to unsnap the shifter bezel
5-6 50 mph (80 km/h) from the finish panel.
The instrument cluster will display the

selected gear that you are currently in and
a shift indicator arrow to assist in
optimizing shifting.
SelectShift will automatically make some
shifts for you in the event that your engine
speed is running at too high, or too low an
RPM.
Note: Engine damage may occur if
excessive engine revving is held without
shifting. E142627
Brake-Shift Interlock 3. Locate the white lever located on the

left side of the shifter.
WARNINGS 4. Using the tool move the white lever
Do not drive your vehicle until you towards the rear of the shifter.
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
138

Transmission
5. While holding the white lever in the rear

position, move the shifter from the park
position.
6. Press the shifter bezel back into the top
finish panel until it snaps back into
position.
7. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle
and release the parking brake.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud

or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
139

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: It is recommended that you reinstall

the repaired tire or replace the tire as soon
This system is a proactive system. It has as possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes
the ability to anticipate wheel slip and between the front and rear axles could
transfer torque to the rear wheels before cause system damage or default the system
slip occurs. Even when wheel slip is not to front-wheel drive.
present, the system is continuously making The system gives your vehicle some limited
adjustments to the torque distribution, in off-road capabilities. Operating your
an attempt to improve straight line and vehicle in conditions other than moderate
cornering behavior, both on and off road. sand, snow, mud or rough roads could
The system automatically turns on every subject it to excessive stress and heat
time you switch the ignition on. which could result in system damage. This
will not be covered by your vehicle
All components of the system are sealed warranty.
and do not require maintenance.
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE

Note: When a system malfunction is
present, a warning message will be
displayed in the information display. See
(page 87). This means the system is not
functioning correctly and has defaulted to E142669
front-wheel drive only. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer. A graphic will be displayed in the
information display to advise you of the
Note: A message will be displayed in the
power distribution between the front and
information display when the system
rear wheels. The more the area is filled the
overheats and switches to front-wheel drive.
more power is being distributed to that
This condition may occur if you operate your
wheel.
vehicle in extreme high load conditions or
with excessive wheel slip, (i.e. deep sand). Driving in Special Conditions With
To resume four-wheel drive function as soon Four-Wheel Drive
as possible, stop your vehicle in a safe
location and switch the ignition off. After Four-wheel drive vehicles are suitable for
the system cools and normal four-wheel driving on sand, snow, mud and rough
drive functionality resumes, a message will roads and have operating characteristics
be displayed for approximately five seconds. that are somewhat different from
Note: If a warning message appears in the conventional vehicles, both on and off the
information display when using the spare freeway.
tire, it should turn off after reinstalling the Note: It may be useful to switch Traction
repaired or replaced road tire and you switch control off. This allows for more wheel spin
the ignition on. and engine torque in certain off road
conditions or if your vehicle becomes stuck.
140

When driving at slow speeds off road under in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
high load conditions, use a low gear when pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
possible. Low gear operation will maximize pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
the engine and transmission cooling required. Avoid abrupt steering,
capability. acceleration and braking. This could result
Under severe operating conditions, the air in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
conditioning may cycle on and off to of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
prevent the engine from overheating. all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
Basic Operating Principles In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which skidding the tires and do not attempt any
can affect the normal steering sharp steering wheel movements.
characteristics of your vehicle. If your vehicle goes from one type of
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel) there will be a change in the way
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care. your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking).
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
Sand
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking. When driving over sand, try to keep all four
When your vehicle speed has been reduced wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
not turn the steering wheel sharply while to a lower gear and drive steadily through
returning your vehicle to the road. the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
returning to the road. You may lose control an extended period of time. This will cause
if you do not slow down or if you turn the the system to overheat. A message will be
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. displayed in the information display. See
(page 87).
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor To resume operation, switch the ignition
damage to your vehicle rather than off and allow the system to cool down for
attempt a sudden return to the road which a minimum of 15 minutes. After the system
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways has cooled down, a message will be
out of control or roll over. Remember, your displayed briefly in the information display.
safety and the safety of others should be See (page 87).
your primary concern. When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
Emergency Maneuvers gear when possible. Low gear operation
In an unavoidable emergency situation will maximize the engine and transmission
where a sudden sharp turn must be made, cooling capability.
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
141

Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain

causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck Although natural obstacles may make it
to the point that assistance may be necessary to travel diagonally up or down
required from another vehicle. Remember, a hill or steep incline, you should always
you may be able to back out the way you try to drive straight up or straight down.
came if you proceed with caution. Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
Mud and Water sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
Mud
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
speed or direction when you are driving in what conditions are on the other side. Do
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can not drive in reverse over a hill without the
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle aid of an observer.
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
until you regain control of your vehicle. in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
After driving through mud, clean off residue a lower gear from a higher gear once the
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. ascent has started. This reduces strain on
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating the engine and the possibility of stalling.
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
could damage drive components. around because this could cause vehicle
Water roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
safe location.
If you must drive through high water, drive
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
be limited.
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
When driving through water, determine the resulting in loss of vehicle control.
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the wheel rims. If the ignition
system gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, the axle
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant E143949
should be checked and changed if
necessary.
142

Descend a hill in the same gear you would Avoid sudden braking. Although a
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
brake application and brake overheating. better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as
overdrive or move the transmission braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
selector lever to a lower gear. When become overconfident as to road
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard conditions.
braking as you could lose control. The front
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
between you and other vehicles for
your vehicle.
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore consider using one of the lower gears. In
apply the brakes steadily. Do not pump the emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake pedal. brake steadily. As your vehicle has a four
wheel anti-lock brake system, do not pump
Driving on Snow and Ice the brake pedal. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 145).
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
conditions that require tire chains or Snow
cables, then it is critical that you drive If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for it may be rocked out by shifting between
longer stopping distances and avoid forward and reverse gears, stopping
aggressive steering to reduce the chances between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
the direction of the slide until you regain is not at normal operating temperature,
control of your vehicle. damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause than a minute, damage to the transmission
transmission damage. and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and Maintenance and Modifications
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on The suspension and steering systems on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel your vehicle have been designed and
in the direction of the slide until you regain tested to provide predictable performance
control. whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
Avoid sudden applications of power and
make modifications such as adding or
quick changes of direction on snow and
removing parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
bars) or by using replacement parts not
steadily when starting from a full stop.
equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
143

We recommend that you use caution when

your vehicle has either a high load or device
(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.
144

Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION Emergency Brake Assist

Emergency brake assist detects when you
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
brake heavily by measuring the rate at
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
which you press the brake pedal. It
continuous squeal sound is present, the
provides maximum braking efficiency as
brake linings may be worn-out and an
long as you press the pedal. Emergency
authorized dealer should check them. If the
brake assist can reduce stopping distances
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in critical situations.
in the steering wheel while braking, an
authorized dealer should check your vehicle. Anti-lock Brake System
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving This system helps you maintain steering
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the control during emergency stops by keeping
brakes wear and does not contribute to the brakes from locking.
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy This lamp momentarily
Wheels (page 239). illuminates when you switch the
See Warning Lamps and ignition on. If the light does not
Indicators (page 84). illuminate during start up, remains on or
E138644 flashes, the anti-lock braking system may
be disabled. Have the system checked by
Wet brakes result in reduced braking an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a system is disabled, normal braking is still
few times when driving from a car wash or effective.
standing water to dry the brakes.
If the brake warning lamp
Brake Over Accelerator illuminates with the parking
E138644
brake released, have your brake
In the event the accelerator pedal
system serviced immediately.
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
stop. Switch the engine off, move the
transmission to park (P) and apply the Note: When the system is operating, the
parking brake. Inspect the accelerator brake pedal may pulse and may travel
pedal and the area around it for any items further. Maintain pressure on the brake
or debris that may be obstructing its pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
movement. If none are found and the system. This is normal.
condition persists, have your vehicle towed The anti-lock braking system will not
to the nearest authorized dealer. eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
145

Brakes
PARKING BRAKE WARNINGS

During all times, you are responsible
WARNING for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and
Always set the parking brake fully
intervening, if required.
and make sure you shift the gearshift
lever to park (P). Switch the ignition If the engine is revved excessively, or
off and remove the key whenever you leave if a malfunction is detected, the
your vehicle. system will be deactivated.
Note: Do not press the release button while The system makes it easier to pull away
pulling the lever up. when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
To apply the parking brake:
When the system is active, your vehicle will
1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.
remain stationary on the slope for two to
2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its three seconds after you release the brake
fullest extent. pedal. This allows you time to move your
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and foot from the brake to the accelerator
facing uphill, shift the gearshift lever to park pedal. The brakes release automatically
(P) and turn the steering wheel away from when the engine has sufficient torque to
the curb. prevent your vehicle from rolling down the
grade. This is an advantage when pulling
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and away on a slope, for example from a car
facing downhill, shift the gearshift lever to park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing
park (P) and turn the steering wheel toward uphill into a parking space.
the curb.
The system will activate automatically on
To release the parking brake: any slope that will cause significant vehicle
1. Press the brake pedal firmly. rollback. For vehicles with a manual
transmission, you can switch this feature
2. Pull the lever up slightly.
off using the information display. See
3. Press the release button and push the Information Displays (page 87). The
lever down. system will remain on or off depending on
how it was last set.
HILL START ASSIST Note: There is no warning lamp to indicate
the system is either on or off.
WARNINGS Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Auto
The system does not replace the Hold, Hill Start Assist will not be available
parking brake. When you leave your while Auto Hold is active.
vehicle, always apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into park Using Hill Start Assist
(P) (automatic transmission) or first gear
(1) (manual transmission). 1. Bring your vehicle to a complete
standstill. Keep the brake pedal
You must remain in your vehicle once pressed and select an uphill gear (for
you have activated the system. example, first (1) when facing uphill or
reverse (R) when facing downhill).
146

Brakes
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle

is on a slope, the system will activate
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain
on the slope without rolling away for
about two or three seconds. This hold
time will automatically be extended if
you are in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
brakes will release automatically.
Switching the System On and Off

You can switch this feature on or off if your
vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display.
See General Information (page 87). The
system remembers the last setting when
you start your vehicle.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a
manual transmission and an information
display, you cannot turn the system on or
off. When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
147

Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Using the Information Display

Controls
The traction control system helps avoid
You can switch this feature off or on in the
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
information display. See General
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system Information (page 87).
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power Using a Switch (If Equipped)
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, Use the traction control switch on the
the system reduces engine power in order instrument panel to switch the system off
to increase traction. or on.
System Indicator Lights and

USING TRACTION CONTROL Messages
The stability and traction control
WARNING
light:
The stability and traction control E138639
light illuminates steadily if the • Temporarily illuminates on engine

system detects a failure. Make sure start-up.
you did not manually disable the traction
• Flashes when a driving condition
control system using the information
activates either of the systems.
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light • Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
is still illuminating steadily, have the of the systems.
system serviced by an authorized dealer The stability and traction control
immediately. Operating your vehicle with off light temporarily illuminates
the traction control disabled could lead to on engine start-up and stays on
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, when you switch the traction control
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. system off.
The system automatically turns on each

time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off

When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.
148

Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION If a fault occurs in either the stability

control or the traction control system, you
WARNINGS may experience the following conditions:
Vehicle modifications involving • The stability and traction control light
braking system, aftermarket roof illuminates steadily.
racks, suspension, steering system, • The stability control and traction
tire construction and wheel and tire size control systems do not enhance your
may change the handling characteristics vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
of your vehicle and may adversely affect the wheels.
the performance of the electronic stability • The Adaptive Steering system (if
control system. In addition, installing any equipped) automatically changes the
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with steering function to a fixed steering
and adversely affect the electronic stability ratio. See Steering (page 167).
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from If a driving condition activates either the
the front center console, the tunnel, and stability control or the traction control
the front seats in order to minimize the risk system you may experience the following
of interfering with the electronic stability conditions:
control sensors. Reducing the • The stability and traction control light
effectiveness of the electronic stability flashes.
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle • Your vehicle slows down.
rollover, personal injury and death. • Reduced engine power.
Remember that even advanced • A vibration in the brake pedal.
technology cannot defy the laws of • The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
physics. It’s always possible to lose
• If the driving condition is severe and
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
pedal may move as the system applies
driving on any road condition can cause
higher brake force.
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or The stability control system has several
property damage. Activation of the features built into it to help you maintain
electronic stability control system is an control of your vehicle:
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road; Electronic Stability Control
this could reduce the operator’s ability to The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
control the vehicle potentially resulting in to prevent skids or lateral slides by
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, applying brakes to one or more of the
personal injury and death. If your electronic wheels individually and, if necessary,
stability control system activates, SLOW reducing engine power.
DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each

time you switch the ignition on.
149

Stability Control
Roll Stability Control USING STABILITY CONTROL

The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which Control™ (RSC®)
it changes by applying the brakes to one The system automatically activates when
or more wheels individually. you start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac
Traction Control with RSC system cannot be completely
turned off, but the electronic stability
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability control and roll stability control portions
to maintain traction of the wheels by of the system are disabled when the
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See transmission is in position R. You can turn
Using Traction Control (page 148). off the traction control portion of the
system independently. See Using
Traction Control (page 148).
B
A
A B A
E72903
A Vehicle without stability control

skidding off its intended route.
B Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
150

Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: The sensing system cannot be turned

off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
WARNINGS of Operation (page 49).
To help avoid personal injury, please Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
read and understand the limitations such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing
of the system as contained in this system may detect that add-on device and
section. Sensing is only an aid for some therefore provide warnings. It is suggested
(generally large and fixed) objects when that you disable the rear sensing system
moving on a flat surface at parking speeds. when you attach an add-on device to your
Certain objects with surfaces that absorb vehicle to prevent these warnings.
ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's The sensing system warns the driver of
parking aid systems, traffic control obstacles within a certain range of your
systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement vehicle. The system turns on automatically
weather, air brakes, and external motors whenever you switch the ignition on.
and fans may also affect the function of
the sensing system; this may include The system can be switched off through
reduced performance or a false activation. the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
To help avoid personal injury, always shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
use caution when in reverse (R) and General Information (page 87).
when using the sensing system.
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
This system is not designed to message appears in the information
prevent contact with small or moving display. See Information Messages
objects. The system is designed to (page 90).
provide a warning to assist the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to avoid
damaging your vehicle. The system may REAR PARKING AID
not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground. The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
Certain add-on devices such as large vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks rate of the audible warning increases.
and any device that may block the When the obstacle is less than 12 in
normal detection zone of the system, may (30 cm) away, the warning sounds
create false beeps. continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and bumper, the tone sounds for only three
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors seconds. Once the system detects an
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be object approaching, the warning sounds
affected. Do not clean the sensors with again.
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
151

Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance

indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
E130178 distance indicator blocks are grayed
out.
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped)
bumper.
The front sensors are active when the
The system detects certain objects while transmission is in any position other than
the transmission is in reverse (R) : park (P) and your vehicle is traveling at low
• Your vehicle is moving toward a speed.
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only E187330
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away the front bumper. The coverage area
from the bumper. decreases at the outer corners.
When your vehicle approaches an object,
a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning
tone repeat rate increases. The warning
tone sounds continuously when an object
is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front
bumper.
152

Parking Aids
You can switch the system off through the If the transmission is in neutral (N), the
information display menu or from the system provides visual indication only
pop-up message that appears once you when your vehicle is moving at 7 mph
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See (12 km/h) or below and an obstacle is
General Information (page 87). If your located inside the detection area. Once
vehicle has a parking aid button, you can your vehicle is stationary, the visual
switch the system off by pressing the indication will stop after 4 seconds.
button.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)

Equipped)
WARNINGS
The system provides obstacle distance Designed to be a supplementary park
indication through the information display. aid, this system may not work in all
The indicator displays: conditions. This system cannot
• As the distance to the obstacle replace the driver’s attention and
decreases the indicator blocks judgment. The driver is responsible for
illuminate and move towards the avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe
vehicle icon. distance and speed, even when the system
is in use.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed Active Park Assist does not apply the
out. brakes under any circumstances.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the
front sensing system provides audio Note: The driver is always responsible for
warnings when your vehicle is moving and controlling the vehicle, supervising the
the detected obstacle is moving towards system and intervening if required.
your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary, The system detects an available parallel
the audio warning will be stopped after 2 parking space and automatically steers
seconds. Visual indication is always your vehicle into the space (hands-free)
present in reverse (R). while you control the accelerator, gearshift
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any and brakes. The system visually and
other forward gear (for example, low (L), audibly instructs you to park your vehicle.
sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual The system may not function correctly if
transmission), the front sensing system something passes between the front
provides audio and visual warnings when bumper and the parking space (a
your vehicle is moving below a speed of pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the
7 mph (12 km/h) and an obstacle is located neighboring parked vehicle is high off the
inside the detection area. Once the vehicle ground (for example, a bus, tow truck or
is stationary, the audio warning will be flatbed truck).
stopped after 2 seconds and the visual
indication stops after 4 seconds. If the Note: The sensors may not detect objects
obstacles detected are within 12 in in heavy rain or other conditions that cause
(30 cm), the visual indication remains on. disruptive reflections.
153

Parking Aids
Note: The sensors may not detect objects Using Active Park Assist
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference (motorcycle Press the button located on the
exhaust, truck air brakes or horns). center console near the gearshift
E146186
lever or the right side of the
Do not use the system if: center stack.
• You have attached a bike rack, trailer
or similar object close to the sensors A message and a corresponding graphic
on the front or rear of your vehicle. appears in the display screen to indicate
• You have attached an overhanging the system is searching for a parking space.
object (surfboard) to the roof. Use the direction indicator to select which
side of your vehicle you want the system
• The front bumper or side sensors are to search.
damaged or obstructed by a foreign
object (front bumper cover). Note: If the direction indicator is not on, the
system automatically searches on your
• A mini-spare tire is in use. vehicle's passenger side.
E130107
Note: You should drive your vehicle within

When the system finds a suitable space,
5 ft (1.5 m) of the parked vehicles while
the touchscreen displays a message and
passing a parking space.
a tone sounds. Slow down, continue
moving forward and stop when another Note: The system always offers the last
tone sounds and a message displays on detected parking space (for example, if the
the touchscreen, then follow the vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
instructions on the touchscreen. are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: You must observe that the selected Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
space remains clear of obstructions at all (35 km/h), the touchscreen shows a
times in the maneuver. message to alert you to reduce your vehicle
speed.
Note: Active park assist may not detect
vehicles with overhanging loads (a bus or a Automatic Steering into Parking
truck), street furniture and other items. You Space
must make sure the selected space is
suitable for parking. Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h), the system switches off and you
need to take full control of your vehicle.
154

Parking Aids
Note: If a maneuver is interrupted before When you shift the transmission into
completion, the system switches off. The reverse (R), with your hands off the wheel
steering wheel position will not indicate the (and nothing obstructing its movement),
actual position of the steering and you have your vehicle steers itself into the space.
to full take control of your vehicle. Instructions to move your vehicle back and
forth in the space display on the
touchscreen.
E130108
When you think your vehicle has enough • Driving above approximately 22 mph
space in front and behind it, or you hear a (35 km/h) for 10 seconds during an
solid tone from the parking aid active park search.
(accompanied by a touchscreen display • Driving above 6 mph (10 km/h) during
message and a chime), bring your vehicle automatic steering.
to a complete stop.
• Turning off the traction control system.
When automatic steering is finished, the
Certain vehicle conditions can also
touch screen displays a message and a
deactivate the system, such as:
tone sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is finished. The driver is • Traction control has activated on a
responsible for checking the parking job slippery or loose surface.
and making any necessary corrections • There is an anti-lock brake system
before putting the transmission in park (P). activation or failure.
Deactivating the Park Assist • Something touches the steering wheel.
Feature If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message is displayed, followed
Manually deactivate the system by: by a tone. Occasional system messages
• Pressing the active park assist button may occur in normal operation. For
once during an active maneuver. recurring or frequent system faults, contact
• Grabbing the steering wheel. an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.
155

Parking Aids
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.

The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space.
The system does not offer a particular space
Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors.

There is not enough room on both sides of your vehicle in order to park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
Your vehicle is farther than 7 ft (2 m) from the parking space.
Your vehicle is closer than 16 in (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles.
The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward when
reverse [R] is selected).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper
size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
156

Parking Aids
The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed,
etc).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage
into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).
During operation, lines appear in the

display which represent your vehicle’s path
REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped) and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since E142435
higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop your vehicle. The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Use caution when using the rear
video camera and the luggage Using the Rear View Camera
compartment door is ajar. If the System
luggage compartment door is ajar, the
camera will be out of position and the The rear view camera system displays
video image may be incorrect. All what is behind your vehicle when you place
guidelines disappear when the luggage the transmission in reverse (R).
compartment door is ajar. Note: The reverse sensing system is not
Use caution when turning camera effective at speeds above 7 mph (12 km/h)
features on or off. Make sure your and may not detect certain angular or
vehicle is not moving. moving objects.
The rear view camera system provides a

video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
157

Parking Aids
The system uses three types of guides to

help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended A B C D E
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features will display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines F
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector. E142436
The camera may not operate correctly

under the following conditions: A Active guidelines
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both B Centerline
reverse lamps are not operating. C Fixed guideline: Green zone
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive E Fixed guideline: Red zone
cleaner. F Rear bumper
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
become misaligned. guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
Camera Guidelines toward an intended path. If you change the
steering wheel position while reversing,
Note: Active guidelines are only available
your vehicle might deviate from the original
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
intended path.
158

Parking Aids
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not The system uses red, yellow and green
display when the steering wheel position highlights that appear on top of the video
is straight. image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your Rear Camera Delay
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
and OFF.
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the The default setting for the rear camera
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to delay is OFF.
get better coverage on both sides and rear When shifting the transmission out of
of the vehicle. reverse (R) and into any gear other than
Manual Zoom park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
WARNING • Your vehicle speed sufficiently
When manual zoom is on, the full increases.
area behind your vehicle may not • You shift your vehicle into park (P).
show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when

the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Camera System Settings

The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed in the display screen. See
General Information (page 87).
159

Cruise Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Switching Cruise Control On

Press and release ON.
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the The indicator displays in the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise instrument cluster.
control when your vehicle speed is greater E71340
than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Setting the Cruise Speed
USING CRUISE CONTROL 1. Drive to desired speed.

2. Press and release SET+.
WARNINGS 3. Take your foot off the accelerator
Do not use cruise control on winding pedal.
roads, in heavy traffic or when the
road surface is slippery. This could Changing the Set Speed
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
injury or death.
you select kph as the display
When you are going downhill, your measurement in the information
vehicle speed may increase above display, the set speed changes in
the set speed. The system will not approximately 2 kph increments. When
apply the brakes but a warning displays. you select mph as the display
Failure to follow this warning could result measurement in the information
in serious personal injury or death. display, the set speed changes in
approximately 1 mph increments.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the • Press the accelerator or brake pedal
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph until you reach the desired speed. Press
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving and release SET+.
uphill. • Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Canceling the Set Speed

Pull and release CAN or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed

Pull and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off

Press and release OFF when the system
E142437 is in stand by mode or switch the ignition
off.
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
160

Driving Aids
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION Note: When a vehicle passes quickly

through the blind spot zone, typically fewer
SYSTEM than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the Using the System
Blind Spot Information System as a The Blind Spot Information System turns
replacement for using the interior on when you start the engine and you drive
and exterior mirrors or looking over your your vehicle forward above 5 mph
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind (8 km/h).
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving. For automatic transmissions, the Blind
Spot Information System remains on while
the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted
into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
A back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when
you drive your vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears
except the reverse (R).
A Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
E124788 System Lights and Messages
The Blind Spot Information System is

designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
designed to alert you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles, E142442
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
161

Driving Aids
The Blind Spot Information System

illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
When the Blind Spot Information System
is alerting on a vehicle and the
corresponding turn signal is ON, the Blind
Spot Information System alert indicator
flashes as an increased warning level.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of
an alert and the turn signal is set to that side
at the same time.
System Sensor Blockage
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving. E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are

located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and
snow in front of the sensors and/or driving
in heavy rain can cause system
degradation. Also, other types of
obstructions in front of the sensor can
cause system degradation. This is referred
to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
162

Driving Aids
If the system detects a degraded Switching the System Off and On

performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
information display. Also the BLIS alert Information System off in the information
indicators will remain ON and BLIS will no display. See General Information (page
longer provide any vehicle warnings. You 87). When the Blind Spot Information
can clear the information display warning System switches off, you will not receive
but the alert indicators will remain alerts and the information display shows
illuminated. a system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in the Blind Spot Information System on or
two ways: off, the alert indicators flash twice.
• After the blockage in front of the Note: The Blind Spot Information System
sensors is removed or the remembers the last selected on or off
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or setting.
stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic
to allow the sensors to detect passing You can also have the Blind Spot
vehicles. Information System switched off
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
and then back ON. switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a dealer.
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Blind Spot CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
Information System off. If your vehicle has
a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer WARNING
tow module, it is recommended to turn the To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
Blind Spot Information System off use the Cross Traffic Alert system as
manually. Operating the Blind Spot a replacement for using the interior
Information System with a trailer attached and exterior mirrors and looking over your
will cause poor system performance. shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a
System Errors replacement for careful driving.
If the system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the telltale will Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
illuminate and a message will appear in of vehicles approaching from the sides
the information display. See Information when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Messages (page 90).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross
Traffic Alert turns off.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions
while your transmission is in reverse (R).
163

Driving Aids
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect fully obstructed. Reversing slowly helps
vehicles that approach with a speed up to increase the coverage area and
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases effectiveness.
when the sensors are partially, mostly or
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only

partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
E142441
164

Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when

parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.
System Lights, Messages and

Audible Alerts
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an

amber alert indicator in the outside mirror
on the side of your vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert
also sounds an audible alert and a E205199
message appears in the information
display indicating a vehicle is coming from The system uses radar sensors that are
the right or left. Cross Traffic Alert works located behind the bumper fascia on each
with the reverse sensing system that side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud,
sounds its own series of tones. See Rear snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these
Parking Aid (page 151). areas, this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 161). If the
Blind Spot Information System is blocked,
Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A
corresponding message appears in the
information display as soon as you shift
the transmission into reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor
area may limit vehicle detection.
165

Driving Aids
The following are other situations that may Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance: whenever the ignition is switched on and
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects ready to provide appropriate alerts when
obstructing the sensors. the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
• Approaching vehicles passing at selected on or off setting.
speeds greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h). You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
• Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph
dealer. Once switched off permanently,
(12 km/h).
the system can only be switched back on
• Backing out of an angled parking spot. at an authorized dealer.
False Alerts
ECO MODE
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it This system assists you in driving more
is towing a trailer, the sensors will efficiently by constantly monitoring
automatically turn the Cross Traffic Alert characteristics of gear changing,
off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but no anticipation of traffic conditions and
factory equipped trailer tow module, it is speeds while driving.
recommended to turn the Cross Traffic Alert
off manually. Operating Cross Traffic Alert The value of these characteristics is
with a trailer attached will cause poor Cross represented by petals shown in the display,
Traffic Alert performance. with five petals being the most efficient.
The more efficiently you drive, the better
There may be certain instances when there the rating, and the better your overall fuel
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert economy.
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some Note: These efficiency values do not result
amount of false alerts are normal; they are in a defined fuel consumption figure. It might
temporary and self-correct. vary as it is not only related to these driving
habits, but also influenced by many other
System Errors factors such as short trips and cold starts.
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with Note: Frequent short trips, where the engine
the left or right sensor a message will does not fully warm up, will also increase
appear in the information display. See fuel consumption.
Information Messages (page 90). The system is accessed using the
information display control. See General
Switching the System Off and On Information (page 87).
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic
Alert off in the information display. See
General Information (page 87). When
you switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you will
not receive alerts and the information
display will display a system off message.
166

Driving Aids
Type 1 STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system to
ensure proper operation. When a system
error is detected a steering message will
appear in the information display.
The electric power steering system
E142444
A B has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system to
ensure proper operation of the electronic
A Anticipation system. When an electronic error is
B Efficient speed detected, a message will be displayed in
the information display. If this happens,
Gear Shifting stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turn
off the engine. After at least 10 seconds,
Using the highest drivable gear appropriate reset the system by restarting the engine,
for the road conditions will improve fuel and watch the information display for a
consumption. steering message. If a steering message
returns, or returns while driving, take the
Anticipation vehicle to your dealer to have it checked.
Adjust your vehicle speed and the distance Obtain immediate service if a system
to other vehicles to avoid the need for error is detected. You may not notice
heavy braking or acceleration to improve any difference in the feel of your
fuel economy. steering, but a serious condition may exist.
Failure to do so may result in loss of
Efficient speed steering control.
Reduce your cruising speed on open roads
to improve economy. Higher speeds use Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
more fuel. power-assisted steering system. There is
no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
Type 2 and 3
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
The relevant information is shown in the you are driving (or if the ignition is turned
display. off), you can steer the vehicle manually,
but it takes more effort. Extreme
Resetting Eco Mode continuous steering may increase the effort
it takes for you to steer. This occurs to
Reset the average fuel consumption by prevent internal overheating and
using the information display control. permanent damage to your steering
Note: New values may take a short time to
calculate.
167

Driving Aids
system. If this should occur, you will neither

lose the ability to steer the vehicle
manually nor will it cause permanent
damage. Typical steering and driving
maneuvers will allow the system to cool
and steering assist will return to normal.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper vehicle alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds
may also make the steering seem to
wander or pull.
168

Load Carrying
REAR UNDER FLOOR LUGGAGE COVERS

STORAGE
WARNINGS
Cargo Management System (If Make sure that the posts are properly
Equipped) latched in mounting features. The
cover may cause injury in a sudden
stop or accident if it is not securely
installed.
Do not place any objects on the
cargo area shade. They may obstruct
your vision or strike occupants of
your vehicle in a sudden stop or crash.
Use the cargo shade to cover items in the

cargo area of your vehicle.
E142445
The system is located in the floor of the

cargo area. Lift the handle to open.
Adjustable Load Floor (If Equipped)
E142447
Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the

mounting features located behind the rear
seat on the rear trim panels to install the
cargo shade.
To operate the cargo shade:
E142446 1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade
rearward.
Vehicles with the standard size spare tire
can adjust the load floor to two positions. 2. Secure both ends of the support rod
The front of the load floor can be placed into the retention slots located on the
either on (for high position) or below (for rear quarter trim panels.
low position) the ledges behind the rear
seats. The rear of the load floor always sits
on the two small shelves located on the
liftgate trim.
169

Load Carrying
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped)

CARRIERS Note: For less wind noise and better
aerodynamics, only install the crossbars
WARNING when you need them for carrying cargo. If
When loading the roof racks, we you prefer to keep the crossbars installed,
recommend you evenly distribute the the front crossbar has two positions. The
load, as well as maintain a low front position is quieter for wind noise. The
center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with rear position may help to reduce wind noise
higher centers of gravity, may handle from an open moonroof. Follow the steps
differently than unloaded vehicles. Take to reposition or remove the front crossbar.
extra precautions, such as slower speeds You can remove the rear crossbar fasteners
and increased stopping distance, when by unscrewing the assembly.
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
The maximum recommended load, evenly

distributed on the crossbars, is:
• 100 pounds (45 kilograms) for vehicles
without a moonroof
• 45 pounds (20 kilograms) for vehicles
with a moonroof.
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load. E142448
For correct roof rack system function, you 1. Remove the crossbar thumbwheels at
must place loads directly on crossbars both sides of the front crossbar by
affixed to the roof rack side rails. When turning them counterclockwise.
using the roof rack system, we recommend
you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars Note: If you cannot loosen the thumbwheel
designed specifically for your vehicle. with your hand, loosen the fastener head.
You can also use a small screwdriver or
Make sure that you securely fasten the similar tool to loosen the thumbwheel by
load. Check the tightness of the load inserting the shaft between the two paddles
before driving and at each fuel stop. of the thumbwheel and rotating it loose.
2. Remove the crossbar by sliding the
ends off of the shoulder bolts in the
side rails.
3. Move the crossbar to the new side rail
position and slide the crossbar onto
the shoulder bolt at that position.
4. Replace and tighten the thumbwheels
at both sides of the crossbar by turning
them clockwise until tight. You can use
a small screwdriver or similar tool to
tighten if necessary.
170

Load Carrying
Make sure to check that the thumbwheels vehicle, familiarize yourself with
are tight each time you add or remove load the following terms for
from the roof rack, and periodically while determining your vehicle’s weight
traveling. Make sure that the load is secure
before traveling. ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle’s Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification
LOAD LIMIT Label:
Vehicle Loading - with and Base Curb Weight - is the weight
without a Trailer of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard
This section will guide you in the equipment. It does not include
proper loading of your vehicle, passengers, cargo, or optional
trailer or both, to keep your loaded equipment.
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
a trailer. Properly loading your weight of your new vehicle when
vehicle will provide maximum you picked it up from your
return of vehicle design authorized dealer plus any
performance. Before loading your aftermarket equipment.
PAYLOAD
E143816
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX

Payload - is the combined weight kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
of cargo and passengers that the payload. The payload listed on the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum Tire Label is the maximum
payload for your vehicle can be payload for the vehicle as built by
found on the Tire Label on the the assembly plant. If you install
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver any aftermarket or
door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have
a Tire Label). Look for “THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
171

Load Carrying
authorized-dealer installed Example only:

equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is E210944
available) or by payload capacity

(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
E210945
CARGO
E143817
172

Load Carrying
Cargo Weight - includes all Certification Label. The label shall

weight added to the Base Curb be affixed to either the door hinge
Weight, including cargo and pillar, door-latch post, or the door
optional equipment. When towing, edge that meets the door-latch
trailer tongue load or king pin post, next to the driver seating
weight is also part of cargo weight. position. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is Gross Axle Weight Rating.
the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) including Note: For trailer towing
vehicle curb weight and all information refer to the RV and
payload. Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or
rear). These numbers are shown
on the Safety Compliance
GVW
E143818
Safety Compliance Certification

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - Label. The label shall be affixed
is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus to either the door hinge pillar,
cargo, plus passengers. door-latch post, or the door edge
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight that meets the door-latch post,
Rating) - is the maximum next to the driver seating position.
allowable weight of the fully The Gross Vehicle Weight must
loaded vehicle (including all never exceed the Gross Vehicle
options, equipment, passengers Weight Rating.
and cargo). It is shown on the
173

Load Carrying
Example only:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
Label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
GCW GVW
E143819
174

Load Carrying
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel

- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus King Pin Weight - refers to the
the weight of the fully loaded amount of the weight that a trailer
trailer. pushes down on a trailer hitch.
GCWR (Gross Combined Examples: For a 5000 pound
Weight Rating) - is the maximum (2268 kilogram) conventional
allowable weight of the vehicle trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and
and the loaded trailer, including 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue
all cargo and passengers, that the load range of 500 to 750 pounds
vehicle can handle without risking (227 to 340 kilograms). For an
damage. (Important: The towing 11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth
vehicle’s braking system is rated wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and
for operation at Gross Vehicle 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin
Weight Rating, not at Gross load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds
Combined Weight Rating.) (782 to 1304 kilograms).
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed WARNINGS
vehicles and for trailers where the Do not exceed the GVWR or
Gross Combined Weight of the the GAWR specified on the
towing vehicle plus the trailer Safety Compliance Certification
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Label.
Rating of the towing vehicle. The Do not use replacement tires
Gross Combined Weight must with lower load carrying
never exceed the Gross capacities than the original tires
Combined Weight Rating. because they may lower the
Maximum Loaded Trailer vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
Weight - is the highest possible limitations. Replacement tires
weight of a fully loaded trailer the with a higher limit than the original
vehicle can tow. It assumes a tires do not increase the GVWR
vehicle with mandatory options, and GAWR limitations.
driver and front passenger weight Exceeding any vehicle weight
(150 pounds [68 kilograms] rating limitation could result
each), no cargo weight (internal in serious damage to the vehicle
or external) and a tongue load of and/or personal injury.
10–15% (conventional trailer) or
king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth
wheel trailer). Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and Steps for determining the
Trailer Towing Guide available at correct load limit:
an authorized dealer) for more
detailed information.
175

Load Carrying
1. Locate the statement "The *Suppose your vehicle has a

combined weight of occupants 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and cargo should never exceed and luggage capacity. You decide
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your to go golfing. Is there enough load
vehicle’s placard. capacity to carry you, four of your
2. Determine the combined friends and all the golf bags? You
weight of the driver and and four friends average 220
passengers that will be riding pounds (99 kilograms) each and
in your vehicle. the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
3. Subtract the combined weight The calculation would be: 1400 -
of the driver and passengers (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
from XXX kg or XXX lb. - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
4. The resulting figure equals the enough load capacity in your
available amount of cargo and vehicle to transport four friends
luggage load capacity. For and your golf bags. In metric units,
example, if the “XXX” amount the calculation would be: 635
equals 1,400 lb. and there will kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
be five 150 lb. passengers in (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
your vehicle, the amount of 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
available cargo and luggage *Suppose your vehicle has a
load capacity is 650 lb. 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.). and luggage capacity. You and
5. Determine the combined one of your friends decide to pick
weight of luggage and cargo up cement from the local home
being loaded on the vehicle. improvement store to finish that
That weight may not safely patio you have been planning for
exceed the available cargo and the past two years. Measuring the
luggage load capacity inside of the vehicle with the rear
calculated in Step 4. seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
6. If your vehicle will be towing a (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
trailer, load from your trailer you have enough load capacity to
will be transferred to your transport the cement to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to home? If you and your friend each
determine how this reduces the weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
available cargo and luggage the calculation would be: 1400 -
load capacity of your vehicle. (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
The following gives you a few - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
examples on how to calculate the not have enough cargo capacity
available amount of cargo and to carry that much weight. In
luggage load capacity: metric units, the calculation would
176

Load Carrying
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 Special Loading Instructions

kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. and Utility-type Vehicles
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds WARNING
(104 kilograms). If you remove Loaded vehicles may handle
three 100-pound (45-kilogram) differently than unloaded
cement bags, then the load vehicles. Extra precautions, such
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x as slower speeds and increased
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - stopping distance, should be
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have taken when driving a heavily
the load capacity to transport the loaded vehicle.
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 Your vehicle can haul more cargo
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) = and people than most passenger
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms. cars. Depending upon the type
and placement of the load,
The above calculations also hauling cargo and people may
assume that the loads are raise the center of gravity of the
positioned in your vehicle in a vehicle.
manner that does not overload
the Front or the Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position.
177

Towing
TOWING A TRAILER Load Placement
WARNINGS To help minimize how trailer

movement affects your vehicle
Do not exceed the GVWR or when driving:
the GAWR specified on the
certification label. • Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
Towing trailers beyond the • Load the heaviest items
maximum recommended centered between the left and
gross trailer weight exceeds the right side trailer tires.
limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, • Load the heaviest items above
transmission damage, structural the trailer axles or just slightly
damage, loss of vehicle control, forward toward the trailer
vehicle rollover and personal tongue. Do not allow the final
injury. trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
Your vehicle may have electrical • Select a ball mount with the
items, such as fuses or relays, correct rise or drop. When both
related to towing. See Fuses the loaded vehicle and trailer
(page 202). are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
Your vehicle's load capacity angled down toward your
designation is by weight, not by vehicle, when viewed from the
volume, so you cannot necessarily side.
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer. When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
Towing a trailer places an extra or shudder may be present due to
load on your vehicle's engine, the increased payload weight.
transmission, axle, brakes, tires Additional information regarding
and suspension. Inspect these proper trailer loading and setting
components periodically during, your vehicle up for towing is
and after, any towing operation. located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
171).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
178

Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online

Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If RECOMMENDED TOWING

WEIGHTS
Equipped)
Note: Do not exceed the trailer

WARNING weight for your vehicle
Turning off trailer sway control configuration listed in the chart
increases the risk of loss of vehicle below.
control, serious injury or death. Ford
does not recommend disabling this feature Note: Be sure to take into
except in situations where speed reduction consideration trailer frontal
2
area.
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing), Do not exceed 20 feet (1.86
the driver has significant trailer towing 2
experience, and can control trailer sway

meters ) if your vehicle is not
and maintain safe operation. equipped 2
with a towing2
package or
30 feet (2.79 meters ) if your
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer vehicle is equipped with a towing
sway, but reduces it when it begins. package.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers Note: For high altitude operation,
from swaying. reduce the gross combined weight
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed by 2% per 1000 feet (300 meters)
is too high, the system may turn on multiple starting at the 1000 foot (300
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed. meter) elevation point.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine Note: Certain states require
torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer electric trailer brakes for trailers
begins to sway, the stability control over a specified weight. Be sure to
warning lamp flashes and a message check state regulations for this
appears in the information display. See specified weight. The maximum
Information Messages (page 90). Slow trailer weights listed may be limited
your vehicle down, pull safely to the side to this specified weight, as the
of the road and check for correct load
distribution.
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
You can switch this feature off in the needed to activate electric trailer
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
brakes.
on.
179

Towing
Your vehicle may tow a trailer maximum trailer weight listed for
provided the maximum trailer your vehicle configuration on the
weight is less than or equal to the following chart.
Maximum trailer
Powertrain Maximum GCWR 1
weight
2.5L 2WD 5351 lb (2427 kg) 1500 lb (681 kg)
1.6L GTDI 2WD 5862 lb (2659 kg) 2000 lb (907 kg)
2.0L GTDI 2WD

2 5957 lb (2702 kg) 2000 lb (907 kg)
2.0L GTDI 2WD

3 7457 lb (3382 kg) 3500 lb (1588 kg)
1.6L GTDI 4WD 6005 lb (2724 kg) 2000 lb (907 kg)
2.0L GTDI 4WD

2 6091 lb (2763 kg) 2000 lb (907 kg)
2.0L GTDI 4WD

3 7591 lb (3443 kg) 3500 lb (1588 kg)
1
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
2
Without trailer towing package.
3
With trailer towing package.
180

Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Weight-distributing Hitches

Follow these guidelines for safe WARNING
towing: Do not adjust a
• Do not tow a trailer until you weight-distributing hitch to
drive your vehicle at least any position where the rear
1,000 mi (1,600 km). bumper of the vehicle is higher
• Consult your local motor than it was before attaching the
vehicle laws for towing a trailer. trailer. Doing so will defeat the
• See the instructions included function of the weight-distributing
with towing accessories for the hitch, which may cause
proper installation and unpredictable handling, and could
adjustment specifications. result in serious personal injury.
• Service your vehicle more When hooking-up a trailer using a
frequently if you tow a trailer. weight-distributing hitch, always
See your scheduled use the following procedure:
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow 1. Park the loaded vehicle,
the instructions the rental without the trailer, on a level
agency gives you. surface.
You can find information on load 2. Measure the height to the top
specification terms found on the of your vehicle's front wheel
tire label and Safety Compliance opening on the fender. This is
label as well as instructions on H1.
calculating your vehicle's load in 3. Attach the loaded trailer to
the Load Carrying chapter. See your vehicle without the
Load Limit (page 171). weight-distributing bars
connected.
Remember to account for the
trailer tongue weight as part of 4. Measure the height to the top
your vehicle load when calculating of your vehicle's front wheel
the total vehicle weight. opening on the fender a second
time. This is H2.
Hitches
5. Install and adjust the tension
Do not use a hitch that either in the weight-distributing bars
clamps onto the bumper or so that the height of your
attaches to the axle. vehicle's front wheel opening
on the fender is approximately
Distribute the trailer load so half the way down from H2,
10-15% of the total trailer weight toward H1.
is on the tongue.
181

Towing
6. Check that the trailer is level or Trailer Brakes

slightly nose down toward your
vehicle. If not, adjust the ball WARNING
height accordingly and repeat Do not connect a trailer's
Steps 2-6. hydraulic brake system
When the trailer is level or slightly directly to your vehicle's brake
nose down toward the vehicle: system. Your vehicle may not have
• Lock the bar tension adjuster enough braking power and your
in place. chances of having a collision
greatly increase.
• Check that the trailer tongue
securely attaches and locks
onto the hitch. Electric brakes and manual,
automatic or surge-type trailer
• Install safety chains, lighting, brakes are safe if you install them
and trailer brake controls as properly and adjust them to the
required by law or the trailer manufacturer's specifications. The
manufacturer. trailer brakes must meet local and
Safety Chains federal regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's
Note: Never attach safety chains braking system operation is at
to the bumper. the gross vehicle weight rating,
Always connect the safety chains not the gross combined weight
to the hook retainers of your rating.
vehicle hitch. Separate functioning brake
To connect the trailer’s safety systems are required for safe
chains, cross them under the control of towed vehicles and
trailer tongue and allow enough trailers weighing more than
slack for turning tight corners. Do 1500 pounds (680 kilograms)
not allow the chains to drag on the when loaded.
ground.
182

Towing
Trailer Lamps • When stopped in congested or

heavy traffic during hot
WARNING weather, place the gearshift in
Never connect any trailer position P to aid engine and
lamp wiring to the vehicle's transmission cooling and to
tail lamp wiring; this may damage help A/C performance.
the electrical system resulting in • Turn off the speed control with
fire. Contact your authorized heavy loads or in hilly terrain.
dealer as soon as possible for The speed control may turn off
assistance in proper trailer tow automatically when you are
wiring installation. Additional towing on long, steep grades.
electrical equipment may be • Shift to a lower gear when
required. driving down a long or steep
hill. Do not apply the brakes
Trailer lamps are required on most continuously, as they may
towed vehicles. Make sure all overheat and become less
running lights, brake lights, turn effective.
signals and hazard lights are • If your transmission is equipped
working. with a Grade Assist or
Before Towing a Trailer Tow/Haul feature, use this
feature when towing. This
Practice turning, stopping and provides engine braking and
backing up to get the feel of your helps eliminate excessive
vehicle-trailer combination before transmission shifting for
starting on a trip. When turning, optimum fuel economy and
make wider turns so the trailer transmission cooling.
wheels clear curbs and other • Allow more distance for
obstacles. stopping with a trailer
attached. Anticipate stops and
When Towing a Trailer brake gradually.
• Do not drive faster than • Avoid parking on a grade.
70 mph (113 km/h) during the However, if you must park on a
first 500 mi (800 km). grade:
• Do not make full-throttle 1. Turn the steering wheel to
starts. point your vehicle tires away
• Check your hitch, electrical from traffic flow.
connections and trailer wheel 2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
lug nuts thoroughly after you
have traveled 50 mi (80 km). 3. Place the automatic
transmission in position P.
183

Towing
4. Place wheel chocks in front TOWING POINTS

and back of the trailer wheels.
(Chocks not included with Due to local market requirements in some
vehicle.) countries, some vehicles may be equipped
with a recovery hook.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat
or Personal Watercraft (PWC) Recovery Hook Location
If your vehicle is equipped with a screw-in
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the recovery hook, it is located in the luggage
trailer before backing the trailer compartment under the floor cover.
into the water. If your vehicle is not equipped with a
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the recovery hook, you can purchase one from
trailer after removing the trailer your dealer.
from the water. Installing the Recovery Hook
When backing down a ramp There is an installation point for the
during boat launching or retrieval: recovery hook located behind the fascia.
• Do not allow the static water Note: The screw-in recovery hook has a
level to rise above the bottom left-hand thread. Turn it counterclockwise
edge of the rear bumper. to install it. Make sure that the recovery hook
is fully tightened.
• Do not allow waves to break
higher than 6 in (15 cm) above
the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow
water to enter vehicle
components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability,
emissions, and reliability. E146284
Replace the rear axle lubricant Insert a suitable object to pry open the
anytime the rear axle has been cover (1). Use the recessed (notched)
submerged in water. Water may portion of the cover. Screw in the recovery
hook (2).
have contaminated the rear axle
lubricant, which is not normally Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels
checked or changed unless a leak
is suspected or other axle repair is Switch the ignition to the on position.
Failure to do so results in steering lock and
required. non-function of indicator and brake lamps.
184

Towing
Braking and steering efforts are high if the Ford Motor Company produces a towing
engine is not running. Maintain increased manual for all authorized tow truck
stopping distances. operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain
on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
Towing a four-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, four-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON

FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
E143886
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
If you need to have your vehicle towed, vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
contact a professional towing service or, on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
if you are a member of a roadside and transmission configuration) under the
assistance program, your roadside following conditions:
assistance service provider. • Your vehicle is facing forward for
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and towing in a forward direction.
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your • Place the transmission in position N. If
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford you cannot move the transmission into
Motor Company has not approved a N, you may need to override it. See
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle Transmission (page 137).
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or • Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
by any other means.
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
185

Towing
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 100).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
Front-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
You must place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
Four-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground), as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
all four (4) wheels off the ground such as
when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise,
you cannot recreational tow your vehicle.
186

Driving Hints
BREAKING-IN Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel

economy:
You need to break in new tires for • Sudden accelerations or hard
approximately 300 miles (480 accelerations.
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle • Revving the engine before turning it off.
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics. • Idle for periods longer than one minute.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 • Warm up your vehicle on cold
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed mornings.
frequently and change up through the • Use the air conditioner or front
gears early. Do not labor the engine. defroster.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles • Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
(1600 kilometers). • Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING • Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
Your fuel economy is affected by several • Carry unnecessary weight
things, such as how you drive, the (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
conditions you drive under, and how you lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
maintain your vehicle. weight carried).
You may improve your fuel economy by • Driving with the wheels out of
keeping these things in mind: alignment.
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, Conditions
moderate fashion. • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
• Drive at steady speeds without trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
stopping. speed.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may • Adding certain accessories to your
eliminate the need to stop. vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
• Combine errands and minimize rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
stop-and-go driving. racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving. • To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling equipped).
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 • Using fuel blended with alcohol may
km/h]). lower fuel economy.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use • Fuel economy may decrease with lower
only the recommended size. temperatures during the first 8–10
miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved
• Perform all regularly scheduled fuel economy as compared to driving
maintenance. on hilly terrain.
187

Driving Hints
• Transmissions give their best fuel • Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
economy when operated in the top brakes and to check that they work.
cruise gear and with steady pressure • Check that the horn works.
on the gas pedal.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than • Turn the steering wheel to check that
two-wheel-drive operation. the steering power assist works.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving. FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Always use floor mats that are
WARNING designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
Do not drive through flowing or deep leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
water as you may lose control of your use floor mats that are firmly secured to
vehicle. retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
Note: Driving through standing water can or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
cause vehicle damage. other ways.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water Pedals that cannot move freely can
enters the air filter. cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
Before driving through standing water, injury.
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the front Always make sure that the floor
rocker area of your vehicle. mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
E176360
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
When driving through standing water, drive rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. not another floor mat or other covering.
Your brake performance and traction may Additional floor mats or any other covering
be limited. After driving through water and will reduce the pedal clearance and
as soon as it is safe to do so: potentially interfere with pedal operation.
188

Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat

so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
189

Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE authorized dealer. If a member

requests a tow to an authorized dealer
Vehicles Sold in the United States: that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
Getting Roadside Assistance the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
To fully assist you should you have a costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
offers a complimentary roadside for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
assistance program. This program is vehicle requires service at the nearest
separate from the New Vehicle Limited authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
Warranty. The service is available: operational but the trailer is not, then the
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week. trailer does not qualify for any roadside
• For the coverage period listed on the services.
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Roadside Assistance covers:
Complete the roadside assistance
• A flat tire change with a good spare, if identification card and place it in your
provided with the vehicle (except wallet for quick reference. This card is in
vehicles supplied with a tire inflation the owner's information portfolio in the
kit). glove compartment.
• Battery jump start.
United States Ford vehicle customers who
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement require Roadside Assistance, call
cost is the customer's responsibility). 1-800-241-3673.
• Fuel delivery — independent service If you need to arrange roadside assistance
contractors, if not prohibited by state, for yourself, Ford Motor Company
local or municipal law, shall deliver up reimburses a reasonable amount for
to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal towing to the nearest dealership within
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel information, United States Ford vehicle
delivery service to two no-charge customers call 1-800-241-3673.
occurrences within a 12-month period. Customers need to submit their original
• Winch out — available within 100 ft receipts.
(30.5 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
• Towing — independent service Roadside Assistance
contractors, if not prohibited by state, To fully assist you should you have a
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
within 35 mi (56 km) of the roadside assistance program. This program
disablement location or to the nearest is eligible within Canada or the continental
United States.
190

This program is separate from the New FUEL SHUTOFF

Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage WARNING
period of your vehicle.
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
Canadian customers who require roadside
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
increase the risk of fire and serious
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
Roadside Assistance that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your In the event of a moderate to severe
wallet for quick reference. collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
In Canada, this card is found in the shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment to the engine. Not every impact will cause
of your vehicle. a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside collision, you may restart your vehicle. For
Assistance Program Coverage vehicles equipped with a key system:
The service is available 24 hours a day, 1. Switch off the ignition.
seven days a week. 2. Switch on the ignition.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
may differ from the U.S. coverage. fuel pump.
For complete program coverage details For vehicles equipped with a push button
you may contact your dealer, you can call start system:
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
1. Press the START/STOP button to
our website at www.ford.ca.
switch off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
running, the battery will lose charge. There
and press the START/STOP button
may be insufficient power to restart your
to switch off the ignition.
vehicle.
4. You can either attempt to start the
The hazard warning button is engine by pressing the brake pedal and
located on the instrument panel. the START/STOP button, or switch
Use it when your vehicle is on the ignition only by pressing the
creating a safety hazard for other START/STOP button without
motorists. pressing the brake pedal. Both ways
• Press the button to turn on the hazard re-enable the fuel system.
warning function, and the front and
rear direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them
off.
191

Note: When you try to restart your vehicle Connecting the Jumper Cables
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart. WARNING
Once your vehicle determines that the Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow engine rocker covers, the intake
you to restart. manifold or electrical components
Note: In the event that your vehicle does as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
not restart after your third attempt, contact parts. To avoid reverse polarity
an authorized dealer. connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE vehicles before connecting the cables.
Battery positions may vary.
WARNINGS
The gases around the battery can Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
explode if exposed to flames, sparks, represents the booster vehicle.
or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in personal injury or vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which
can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if
contacted.
Use only an adequate-sized cable
with insulated clamps. 1
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start 3 4
capability. Attempting to push-start a
vehicle with an automatic transmission may
cause transmission damage. 2
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch. Turn all E142664
accessories off.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
192

2. Connect the other end of the positive Removing the Jumper Cables
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the assisting battery. Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the assisting
battery.
4
1
2
E152134
4. Make the final connection of the

negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine, or
connect the negative (-) cable to the
ground connection point, if available.
WARNING 3
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-) E142665
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the 1. Remove the jumper cable from the
gases that surround the battery. ground metal surface or connecting
point, if available.
Jump Starting 2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
vehicle's battery.
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your 3. Remove the jumper cable from the
engine speed between 2000 and 3000 positive (+) terminal of the booster
rpms, as shown in your tachometer. vehicle's battery.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
3. After starting the disabled vehicle, run
vehicle's battery.
both vehicle engines for an additional
three minutes before disconnecting the After starting your disabled vehicle and
jumper cables. removing the jumper cables, allow your
vehicle to idle for several minutes so the
battery can recharge.
193

POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM

The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators will turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
194

Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU

NEED Website
www.owner.ford.com
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle These are some of the items that can be
line will provide warranty service, we found online:
recommend you return to your selling • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
authorized dealer who wants to ensure City/State or Zip Code.
your continued satisfaction. • Owner Manuals.
Please note that certain warranty repairs • Maintenance Schedules.
require special training and equipment, so
• Recalls.
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means • Ford Extended Service Plans.
that, depending on the warranty repair • Ford Genuine Accessories.
needed, you may have to take your vehicle • Service specials and promotions.
to another authorized dealer.
In Canada:
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle Mailing address
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be Customer Relationship Centre
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
remanufactured or other parts that are P.O. Box 2000
authorized by Ford. Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Away From Home Telephone
If you are away from home when your 1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the Website
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer. www.ford.ca
In the United States:
Twitter
Mailing address
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
Ford Motor Company @FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248 Additional Assistance
Dearborn, MI 48126
If you have questions or concerns, or are
Telephone unsatisfied with the service you are
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) receiving, follow these steps:
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1. Contact your Sales Representative or
1-800-232-5952) Service Advisor at your selling or
Additional information and resources are servicing authorized dealer.
available online:
195

Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)

unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
Manager. requires that, if a manufacturer or its
3. If you require assistance or clarification representative is unable to repair a motor
on Ford Motor Company policies, vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
please contact the Ford Customer applicable express warranty after a
Relationship Center. reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
In order to help us serve you better, please
replace the vehicle with one substantially
have the following information available
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
when contacting a Customer Relationship
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
Center:
the actual price paid or payable by the
• Vehicle Identification Number. consumer (less a reasonable allowance
• Your telephone number (home and for consumer use). The consumer has the
business). right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading. presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
In some states within the United States, conform the vehicle to its applicable
you must directly notify Ford in writing express warranties if, within the first 18
before pursuing remedies under your months of ownership of a new vehicle or
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
allowed a final repair attempt. whichever occurs first:
Additionally, in some states within the 1. Two or more repair attempts are made
United States, a consumer has the option on the same non-conformity likely to
of submitting a warranty dispute to the cause death or serious bodily injury OR
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
on the same nonconformity (a defect
the extent allowed by state law, before
or condition that substantially impairs
pursuing replacement or repurchase
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
remedies provided by certain state laws.
OR
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
rights or other rights which are independent of nonconformities for a total of more
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
state replacement or repurchase laws. all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
196

Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting program are usually decided within forty
in court any rights or remedies conferred days after you file your claim with the BBB.
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are not bound by the decision, and
You are also required to use BBB AUTO may reject the decision and proceed to
LINE before exercising rights or seeking court where all findings of the BBB Auto
remedies created by the Federal Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. in the court action. Should you choose to
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
redress by pursuing rights and remedies is then bound by the decision, and must
not created by California Civil Code Section comply with the decision within 30 days
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss of receipt of your acceptance letter.
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
not required by those statutes.
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
THE BETTER BUSINESS You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE new vehicle, information about your
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY) warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a will need to be completed, signed and
warranty concern has not been resolved returned to the BBB along with proof of
using the three-step procedure outlined ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the review the claim for eligibility under the
Services you need section, you may be Program Summary Guidelines.
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program. You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of 1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the BBB AUTO LINE
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor 3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Company to explore options for settlement Arlington, Virginia 22201
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
during mediation or you do not want to requested by calling the Ford Motor
participate in mediation, and if your claim Company Customer Relationship Center
is eligible, you may participate in the at 1-800-392-3673.
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
will be scheduled so that you can present
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
your case in an informal setting before an
procedures, or to discontinue this process
impartial person. The arbitrator will
at any time without notice and without
consider the testimony provided and make
obligation.
a decision after the hearing.
197

Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE GETTING ASSISTANCE

MEDIATION/ARBITRATION OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) CANADA
For vehicles delivered to authorized Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
Canadian dealers. In those cases where country, contact the appropriate foreign
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford embassy or consulate. These officials can
of Canada and the authorized dealer to inform you of local vehicle registration
resolve a factory-related vehicle service regulations and where to find unleaded
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of fuel.
Canada participates in an impartial third If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
party mediation/arbitration program get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
administered by the Canadian Motor than is recommended for your vehicle,
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve without proper conversion may damage
a disagreement when all other efforts to the effectiveness of your emission control
produce a settlement have failed. This system and may cause engine knocking or
procedure is without cost to you and is serious engine damage. Ford Motor
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
Company or Ford of Canada is not
and expensive legal proceedings. responsible for any damage caused by use
In the CAMVAP program, impartial of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at also result in difficulty importing your
mutually convenient times and places in vehicle back into the United States.
an informal environment. These impartial If your vehicle must be serviced while you
arbitrators review the positions of the
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
parties, make decisions and, when Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
appropriate, render awards to resolve
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
binding on both you and Ford of Canada. contact:
CAMVAP services are available in all
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Canadian territories and provinces. For
Customer Relationship Center
more information, without charge or
1555 Fairlane Drive
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Fairlane Business Park #3
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
or visit www.camvap.ca.
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
198

Customer Assistance
For customers in Guam, the If you buy your vehicle in North America
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana and then relocate to any of the above
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the locations, register your vehicle
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call identification number (VIN) and new
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD address with Ford Motor Company Export
(3673). Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by
If your vehicle must be serviced while you emailing expcac@ford.com.
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the authorized dealer cannot help you, the event your inquiry is unresolved,
contact: communicate your concern with the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Customer Relationship Center Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
1555 Fairlane Drive If you require additional assistance or
Fairlane Business Park #3 clarification, please contact the respective
Allen Park, Michigan 48101 Customer Relationship Center as
U.S.A. previously listed.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673) Customers in the U.S. should call
FAX: (313) 390-0804 1-800-392-3673.
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
OWNER'S LITERATURE
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you, To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact: contact Helm, Incorporated at:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY HELM, INCORPORATED

Customer Relationship Center 47911 Halyard Drive
1555 Fairlane Drive Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Fairlane Business Park #3 Attention: Customer Service
Allen Park, Michigan 48101 Or to order a free publication catalog, call
U.S.A. toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Ford: 80004443673 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Lincoln: 80004441067
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
by their website:
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673 www.helminc.com
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384 (Items in this catalog may be purchased
FAX: +971 4 3327266 by credit card, check or money order.)
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
199

Customer Assistance
Obtaining a French Owner’s To contact NHTSA, you may call

Manual the Vehicle Safety Hotline
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
from your authorized dealer or by 1-800-424-9153); go to
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the http://www.safercar.gov; or write
contact information listed previously in this to:
section.
Administrator
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
(U.S. ONLY) Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
E142557 safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
death, you should immediately (CANADA ONLY)
inform the National Highway
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
Traffic Safety Administration which could cause a crash or could cause
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying injury or death, you should immediately
Ford Motor Company. inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
200

Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
Website www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigations-
index-76.htm (English)
Website www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetes-
index-76.htm (French)
Phone 1–800–333–0510
Ford of Canada Contact Information
Website www.ford.ca
Phone 1–800–565-3673
201

Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART WARNINGS

To reduce risk of electrical shock,
Pre-Fuse Box always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
The pre-fuse box is in the engine reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
compartment attached to the positive reservoirs.
battery post. This box contains several high
current fuses. If you need to replace one
of these high current fuses, see an The power distribution box is in the engine
authorized dealer. compartment. It has high-current fuses
that protect your vehicle's main electrical
Power Distribution Box systems from overloads.
You will need to reset some features if you
WARNINGS
disconnect and reconnect the battery. See
Always disconnect the battery before Changing the 12V Battery (page 223).
servicing high current fuses.
E157389
Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover

to remove it.
202

Fuses
Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components
F7 50A** Anti-lock brake system and electronic

stability program pump.
F8 30A** Electronic stability program valve.
F9 — Not used.
F10 40A** Heater blower motor.
F11 — Not used.
F12 30A** Powertrain control module relay.
F13 30A** Starter relay.
F14 25A** Rear power window (without door control
unit).
F15 20A** Front cigar lighter or power outlet.
F16 25A** Front power window (without door control
unit).
F17 20A** Rear power outlet.
F18 20A** Center power outlet.
F19 5A* Anti-lock brake system and electronic
stability program 15 feed.
F20 15A* Horn.
F21 5A* Stop light switch.
F22 15A* Battery monitor system.
F23 5A* Relay coils.
F24 5A* Light switch module.
F25 10A* Power exterior mirror (without door control
unit).
F26 5A* Keep-alive power
F27 15A* Air conditioner clutch.
F28 10A* Vehicle power - fuel injector (2.5L engine).
F29 25A* Rear window defroster.
203

Fuses
F30 15A* Heated mirror (less door control unit).

Heated wiper park.
F31 — Not used.
F32 15A* Vehicle power.
F33 10A* Vehicle power 2.
F36 5A* Active grill shutters.
F37 10A* Occupant classification sensor.
Passenger airbag deactivation indicator.
F38 5A* Engine control module and transmission
control module ignition feed.
F39 20A* Heated driver seat.
F40 5A* Electronic power assist steering 15 feed.
F41 20A* Body control module 15 feed.
F42 15A* Rear wiper.
F43 15A* Headlamp control module supply.
Daytime running light.
F44 15A* Front fog daytime running lamps.
F45 20A* Heated passenger seat.
F46 40A** Smart wiper motor modules.
F47 5A* Heated mirror (less door control unit).
Heated wiper park relay feed.
F48 5A* Keypad.
R1 — Not used.
R2 Micro relay Horn.
R3 Micro relay Heated mirror relay (less door control unit).
Heated wiper park relay.
R4 Micro relay Front fog daytime running lamps.
204

Fuses
R5 — Not used.
R6 — Not used.
R7 — Not used.
R8 Power relay Delayed accessory relay.
R9 — Not used.
R10 Mini relay Starter relay.
R11 Micro relay Air conditioner clutch.
R12 Power relay Cooling fan.
R13 Mini relay Heater blower.
R14 Mini relay Engine control relay.
R15 Power relay Heated rear window.
R16 Power relay Ignition 15.
*Mini fuses **Cartridge fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse

Panel
The fuse panel is on the right side below
the glove box.
205

Fuses
E129926
F56 20A Fuel pump supply, Air mass meter.

F57 — Not used.
F58 5A Not used (spare).
F59 5A Passive anti-theft transceiver.
F60 10A Interior light.
Driver door switch pack.
Glove box light.
Overhead console switch bank.
206

Fuses
F61 20A Cigar lighter.

Power point.
F62 5A Rain sensor module.
Auto-dimming mirror.
F64 — Not used.
F65 10A Liftgate release.
F66 20A Driver door unlock.
F67 7.5A SYNC.
Multifunction display.
Global positioning system module.
F68 — Not used.
F69 5A Instrument cluster.
F70 20A Central lock and unlock supply.
F71 7.5A Heating control head (manual air condi-
tioner).
Dual electronic automatic temperature
control.
F72 7.5A Steering wheel module.
F73 7.5A Data link connector.
F74 15A High beam headlamp supply.
F75 15A Fog lamp.
F76 10A Reversing lamp.
F77 20A Washer pump.
F78 5A Ignition switch.
Start button.
F79 15A Radio.
Navigation DVD player.
Touch screen.
Hazard light switch.
Door lock switch.
F80 20A Moonroof supply.
207

Fuses
F81 5A Radio frequency receiver.

F82 20A Washer pump.
F83 20A Central locking.
F84 20A Drive door unlock.
F85 7.5A Electronic 15 feed.
F86 10A Air bag module.
Occupant classification system.
Passenger air bag deactivation indicator.
F88 25A Supply for F67, F69, F71 and F79.
F89 — Not used.
Luggage Compartment Fuse Panel

The fuse panel is in the luggage
compartment behind the passenger side
wheel well. Remove the fuse panel cover
to gain access to the fuses.
E129927
208

Fuses
F1 5A Hands-free liftgate entry module.

F2 10A Keyless vehicle module.
F3 5A Keyless vehicle door handles.
F4 25A Door control unit front left.
F5 25A Door control unit front right.
F6 25A Door control unit rear left.
F7 25A Door control unit rear right.
F8 25A Passenger seat.
F9 25A Driver seat.
F10 5A Driver seat memory module logic feed.
F11 5A Rear ignition coil feed.
F12 — Not used.
F13 — Not used.
F14 — Not used.
F15 — Not used.
F16 — Not used.
F17 — Not used.
F18 — Not used.
F19 — Not used.
F20 — Not used.
F21 — Not used.
F22 — Not used.
F23 25A Audio amplifier.
F24 30A DC/AC power converter.
F25 25A Power liftgate.
F26 40A Accessories, Trailer tow module 30 feed 1.
209

Fuses
F27 20A Luggage compartment power outlet.

F28 — Not used.
F29 5A Blind spot detection system.
Rear view camera with park assist.
F30 5A Parking aid module.
F31 — Not used.
F32 5A DC/AC power converter.
F33 — Not used.
F34 — Not used.
F35 — Not used.
F36 — Not used.
F37 — Not used.
F38 — Not used.
F39 — Not used.
F40 — Not used.
F41 — Not used.
F42 — Not used.
F43 — Not used.
F44 — Not used.
F45 — Not used.
F46 — Not used.
R1 Power relay Rear 15 relay.
R2 — Not used.
R3 — Not used.
R4 — Not used.
R5 — Not used.
R6 — Not used.
210

Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
E217331
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire. If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
Fuse Types
E207206
Callout Fuse Type
A Micro 2
B Micro 3
C Maxi
D Mini
211

Fuses
Callout Fuse Type
E M Case
F J Case
G J Case Low Profile
212

Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION Working with the Engine On
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help WARNING

maintain its roadworthiness and resale To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
value. There is a large network of and/or personal burn injuries, do not
authorized dealers that are there to help start your engine with the air cleaner
you with their professional servicing removed and do not remove it while the
expertise. We believe that their specially engine is running.
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
They are supported by a wide range of
(P).
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle. 2. Block the wheels.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the OPENING AND CLOSING THE
necessary parts and service. Check your HOOD
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered. Opening the Hood
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space, E142457
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation. 1. Pull the hood release lever.
• Keep all open flames and other burning 2. Slightly lift the hood.
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off

1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
213

Maintenance
E142458
3. Move the catch to the right to release

the hood.
E87786
4. Open the hood and support it with the

hood strut.
Closing the Hood

1. Remove the hood strut from the catch
and secure it correctly in the clip.
2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last 8-12
in (20-30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
214

Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.6L ECOBOOST™
A B C D E
E157261
H G F
A Engine coolant reservoir

B Engine oil filler cap
C Brake fluid reservoir
D Battery
E Power distribution box
F Air filter assembly
G Engine oil dipstick
H Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap
215

Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
A B C D E
H G F
E146022
A Engine coolant reservoir

B Engine oil dipstick
C Brake fluid reservoir
D Battery
E Power distribution box
F Air filter assembly
G Engine oil filler cap
H Windshield washer fluid reservoir
216

Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.5L
A B C D E F G
E146023
H
A Windshield washer fluid reservoir

B Engine coolant reservoir
C Engine oil filler cap
D Engine oil dipstick
E Brake fluid reservoir
F Battery
G Power distribution box
H Air filter assembly
217

Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6L 2. Check the oil level before starting the
engine, or switch the engine off and
ECOBOOST™ wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into
the oil pan.
A B 3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the
dipstick and remove it again to check
the oil level.
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 268).
E188072
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
A Minimum. and could lead to engine damage that may
B Maximum. not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is
between the minimum and the maximum
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L marks.
ECOBOOST™/2.5L Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
A B Adding Engine Oil
E169062
A Minimum.
B Maximum. E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines

ENGINE OIL CHECK by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level conforms to the current engine and
ground. emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
218

Maintenance
WARNINGS WARNINGS
Only add oil when the engine is cold. To reduce the risk of personal injury,
If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes make sure the engine is cool before
for the engine to cool down. unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
Do not remove the filler cap when
pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
the engine is running.
out forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly.
1. Remove the engine oil filler cap. Do not add coolant further than the
2. Add engine oil that meets Ford MAX mark.
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 268).
Note: Automotive fluids are not
3. Wipe off any spilled oil. interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant
4. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn or windshield washer fluid outside of its
it clockwise until you feel a strong specified function and vehicle location.
resistance. Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
Note: Do not add oil further than the system sealants, or additives as they can
maximum mark. Oil levels above the cause damage to the engine cooling or
maximum mark may cause engine damage. heating systems. This damage would not
Note: Soak up any spillage with an be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
absorbent cloth immediately. Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
engine coolant may change color from
orange to pink or light red. As long as the
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated,
this color change does not indicate the
Checking the Engine Coolant engine coolant has degraded nor does it
require the engine coolant to be drained, the
WARNINGS system to be flushed, or the engine coolant
Do not add engine coolant when the to be replaced.
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling When the engine is cold, check the
system can burn you badly. Also, you can concentration and level of the engine
be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine coolant at the intervals listed in the
parts. scheduled maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 344).
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If Note: Make sure that the level is between
sprayed on the windshield, engine the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant
coolant could make it difficult to see reservoir.
through the windshield. Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant
in this chapter.
219

Maintenance
The coolant concentration should be Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will
maintained within 48% to 50%, which escape as you unscrew the cap.
equates to a freeze point between -30°F Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the
(-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C). Ford specification. See Capacities and
Note: For best results, coolant Specifications (page 268).
concentration should be tested with a Whenever coolant has been added, the
refractometer such as Robinair® Coolant coolant level in the coolant reservoir
and Battery Refractometer 75240. We do should be checked the next few times you
not recommend the use of hydrometers or drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough
coolant test strips for measuring coolant prediluted engine coolant to bring the
concentrations. coolant level to the proper level.
Adding Engine Coolant Recycled Engine Coolant
• Do not mix different colors or types of We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the engine coolant since a Ford-approved
correct coolant is used. Mixing of recycling process is not yet available.
engine coolants may harm your
engine’s cooling system. The use of an Used engine coolant should be disposed
improper coolant may harm engine and of in an appropriate manner. Follow your
cooling system components and may community’s regulations and standards
void the warranty. Use prediluted for recycling and disposing of automotive
engine coolant meeting the Ford fluids.
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 268). Severe Climates
• In case of emergency, a large amount If you drive in extremely cold climates:
of water without engine coolant may
• It may be necessary to have a Ford
be added in order to reach a vehicle
authorized dealer increase the coolant
service location. In this instance, the
concentration above 50%.
cooling system must be drained,
chemically cleaned with Motorcraft • A coolant concentration of 60% will
Premium Cooling System Flush, and provide improved freeze point
refilled with engine coolant as soon as protection. Engine coolant
possible. Water alone (without engine concentrations above 60% will
coolant) can cause engine damage decrease the overheat protection
from corrosion, overheating or freezing. characteristics of the engine coolant
and may cause engine damage.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or
any engine coolants mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze (coolant).
Alcohol and other liquids can cause
engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives
to the coolant. These can be harmful
and compromise the corrosion
protection of the engine coolant.
220

Maintenance
If you drive in extremely hot climates: When this occurs the vehicle will still
• It may be necessary to have a Ford operate. However:
authorized dealer decrease the coolant • The engine power will be limited.
concentration to 40%. • The air conditioning system will be
• A coolant concentration of 40% will disabled.
provide improved overheat protection.
Continued operation will increase the
Engine coolant concentrations below
engine temperature and the engine will
40% will decrease the freeze and
completely shut down, causing steering
corrosion protection characteristics of
and braking effort to increase.
the engine coolant and may cause
engine damage. Once the engine temperature cools, the
engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
climates should use prediluted engine
to minimize engine damage.
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection. When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
What You Should Know About Fail- WARNINGS
Safe Cooling Fail-safe mode is for use during
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, emergencies only. Operate your
this feature allows the vehicle to be driven vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
temporarily before incremental component as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
damage is incurred. The “fail-safe” in a safe location and seek immediate
distance depends on ambient repairs. When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain. will have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine steering assist, and power brake assist,
coolant temperature gauge will move to which may increase the possibility of a
the red (hot) area and: crash resulting in serious injury.
A high engine temperature Never remove the coolant reservoir
message will appear in the cap while the engine is running or hot.
information display.
The service engine soon You have limited engine power when in the
indicator will light. fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with
If the engine reaches a preset caution. Your vehicle will not be able to
over-temperature condition, the engine maintain high-speed operation and the
will automatically switch to alternating engine will run rough. Remember that the
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder engine is capable of completely shutting
acts as an air pump and cools the engine. down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. Arrange for your vehicle to be taken to
an authorized dealer.
221

Maintenance
3. If this is not possible, wait a short POWER STEERING FLUID

period for the engine to cool.
CHECK
4. Check the coolant level and replenish
if low. Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
5. Re-start the engine and take your power steering (EPS) system. There is no
vehicle to an authorized dealer. fluid reservoir to check or fill.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repairing
the engine problem increases the chance of WASHER FLUID CHECK
engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
FLUID CHECK washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
The automatic transmission does not have antifreeze protection in cold weather could
a transmission fluid dipstick. result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled Note: The front and rear washer systems
Maintenance (page 344). Your are supplied from the same reservoir.
transmission does not consume fluid. Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
However, if the transmission slips, shifts low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
slowly or if you notice a sign of leaking Ford specifications. See Capacities and
fluid, contact an authorized dealer. Specifications (page 268).
Do not use supplemental transmission State or local regulations on volatile
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning organic compounds may restrict the use
agents. The use of these materials may of methanol, a common windshield washer
affect transmission operation and result antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
in damage to internal transmission containing non-methanol antifreeze
components. agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
BRAKE FLUID CHECK the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX
lines are within the normal operating range; FUEL FILTER
there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid
levels are outside of the normal operating Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
range, the performance of the system fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
could be compromised; seek service from tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
your authorized dealer immediately. is not needed.
222

Maintenance
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY When a low voltage battery replacement

is necessary, see an authorized dealer to
WARNINGS replace the low voltage battery with a Ford
recommended replacement low voltage
Batteries normally produce explosive battery that matches the electrical
gases which can cause personal requirements of the vehicle.
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to To ensure proper operation of the battery
come near the battery. When working near management system (BMS), do not allow
the battery, always shield your face and a technician to connect any electrical
protect your eyes. Always provide correct device ground connection directly to the
ventilation. low voltage battery negative post. A
connection at the low voltage battery
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, negative post can cause inaccurate
excessive pressure on the end walls measurements of the battery condition
could cause acid to flow through the and potential incorrect system operation.
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the Note: If a person adds electrical or
battery with a battery carrier or with your electronic accessories or components to the
hands on opposite corners. vehicle, the accessories or components may
adversely affect the low voltage battery
Keep batteries out of reach of performance and durability and may also
children. Batteries contain sulfuric affect the performance of other electrical
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or systems in the vehicle.
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid top of the battery clean and dry. Also,
contact with skin or eyes, flush make certain the battery cables are always
immediately with water for a minimum of tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
15 minutes and get prompt medical If you see any corrosion on the battery or
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a terminals, remove the cables from the
physician immediately. terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
Battery posts, terminals and related can neutralize the acid with a solution of
accessories contain lead and lead baking soda and water.
compounds. Wash hands after When a battery replacement is required,
handling. the battery should only be replaced with
a Ford recommended replacement battery
Your vehicle has a Motorcraft® that matches the electrical requirements
maintenance-free battery which normally of the vehicle.
does not require additional water during Because your vehicle’s engine is
its life of service. electronically-controlled by a computer,
Note: If your vehicle's battery has a cover some engine control settings are
or shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the maintained by power from the low voltage
battery has been cleaned or replaced. battery. Some engine computer settings,
like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy,
Note: See an authorized dealer for low optimize the driveability and performance
voltage battery access, testing, or of the engine. Some other computer
replacement. settings, like the clock and radio station
223

Maintenance
presets, are also maintained in memory by CHECKING THE WIPER

power from the low voltage battery. When
a technician disconnects and connects the BLADES
low voltage battery, these settings are
erased. Complete the following procedure
in order to restore the settings:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop,
set the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Fully press the brake pedal and start E142463
the vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
operating temperature. While the the blade to check for roughness.
engine is warming up, complete the Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
following: Reset the clock. See Audio or water applied with a soft sponge or
System (page 286). Reset the power cloth.
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 77).
Reset the radio station presets. See CHANGING THE WIPER
Audio System (page 286). BLADES
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute. If the engine turns off, press Poor wiper quality can be improved by
the accelerator pedal to start the cleaning the wiper blades and the
engine. windshield.
7. While the engine is running, press the Replace wiper blades annually for
brake pedal and shift into neutral (N). optimum performance.
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one Front Wiper Blades
minute by pressing on the accelerator
pedal. Lift the wiper arms away from the
9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km) windshield.
to completely relearn the idle and fuel
trim strategy. 1
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy. 1
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries. E129990 2
224

Maintenance
1. Press the locking buttons together. ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

2. Remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order. Vertical Aim Adjustment
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks The headlamps on your vehicle are
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
back to the windshield. The wiper arms will your vehicle has been in an accident, the
automatically return to their normal position alignment of your headlamps should be
when you switch the ignition on. checked by your authorized dealer.
Rear Wiper Blade

Lift the wiper arms away from the rear
window.
E142592
A 8 feet (2.4 meters)

B Center height of lamp to ground
C 25 feet (7.6 meters)
D Horizontal reference line
Vehicles With Halogen Headlamps

1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
E183236
wall or screen on a level surface,
1. Remove the wiper blade. approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
2. Install in the reverse order.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks bulb center from the ground and mark
into place. an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
225

Maintenance
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to Vehicles With High Intensity Discharge
illuminate the wall or screen and open Headlamps
the hood.
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
E142465 other.
4. On the wall or screen you will observe 3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
a flat zone of high intensity light illuminate the wall or screen and open
located at the top of the right hand the hood.
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the high intensity light zone is
not at the horizontal reference line, the
headlamp will need to be adjusted.
E142466
4. There is a distinct cut-off (change from

light to dark) in the left portion of the
E142467 beam pattern. The top edge of this
cut-off should be positioned two
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each inches (5 centimeters) below the
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2 horizontal reference line.
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to aim the headlamp. The horizontal
edge of the brighter light should touch
the horizontal reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
226

Maintenance
3. Pull the headlamp toward the front of

your vehicle to disengage it from its
locating points and then lift the
headlamp up.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to
E142467 accommodate normal changes in pressure.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each Condensation can be a natural by-product
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2 of this design. When moist air enters the
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either lamp assembly through the vents, there is
clockwise or counterclockwise in order a possibility that condensation can occur
to aim the headlamp. when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a thin film of
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps. mist can form on the interior of the lens.
The thin mist eventually clears and exits
Horizontal Aim Adjustment through the vents during normal operation.
Horizontal aim is not required for this Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
vehicle and is non-adjustable. under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
REMOVING A HEADLAMP • Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip
marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the
2 lens.
Examples of unacceptable moisture
2 (usually caused by a lamp water leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or
streaks present on the interior of the
lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if
any of the above conditions of
E142468 unacceptable moisture are present.
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the screws that secure the
lamp assembly.
227

Maintenance
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs

2 4
WARNING
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of children’s
reach. Grasp the bulb by only its
plastic base and do not touch the glass.
The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps
are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it E142470

should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol
before being used. 1. Remove the headlamp.
2. Remove service cap.
Headlamp:
A B C 4. Remove bulb from the headlamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise, then pull it straight
out.
Low beam headlamp:
2 4
E142469
A Side marker
B Low beam headlamp
C High beam headlamp
High beam headlamp: E142471
1. Remove the headlamp.

2. Remove service cap.
4. Remove bulb from the headlamp
counterclockwise, then pull it straight
out.
228

Maintenance
Install the new bulbs in reverse order from Replacing Fog, Park and Turn
the steps above. Be sure that the spring Signal Bulbs
clip is not damaged or detached from the
headlamp assembly during the
replacement procedure. A B C
Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs (If
Equipped)
The low beam headlamps on your vehicle

use a high intensity discharge source.
These lamps operate at a high voltage.
When the bulb is burned out, the bulb and
starter capsule assembly must be replaced
by your authorized dealer.
E142797
Replacing Side Marker Bulbs
A Fog Lamp
B Park Lamp
C Turn Signal lamp
E142472
1. Remove the bulb socket from the

headlamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise. E142798
2. Remove the bulb by gently pull the 1. Remove the screws from the splash
bulb straight out of the socket. shield at the wheel well to gain access
Install the new bulb in reverse order. to the lamp assembly.
229

Maintenance
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in

the off position and open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two bolt covers using a
standard flat tip screwdriver.
3. Remove the two bolts from the lamp
assembly.
4. Gently pull the lamp assembly away
from the vehicle.
E142799
2. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp

counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder
by pulling it straight out.
Install the new bulbs in reverse order from
E142475
the steps above.
Replacing Tail, Brake and Turn
Signal Bulbs 6. Remove the turn signal bulb or the tail
and brake bulb by turning the bulb
socket counterclockwise. Gently pull
the bulb straight out of the socket.
2 Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing Reverse Lamp Assembly

For bulb replacement, see your authorized
dealer.
E142473
230

Maintenance
Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulb Replacing High-Mount Brake Lamp

Bulb
Your vehicle is equipped with an LED
2 center high-mount stop lamp located in
the spoiler. It is designed to last the life of
the vehicle. If replacement is required, see
your authorized dealer.
3 1
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
E72789 chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for
1. Carefully release the spring clip. North America to ensure lamp
2. Remove the lamp. performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will
3. Remove the bulb.
not damage the lamp assembly or void the
Reverse steps to reinstall bulb. lamp assembly warranty and will provide
quality bulb burn time.
Function Trade number
Headlamps high beam (Halogen) 9005LL

* Headlamps high beam (HID) H1
Headlamp low beam (Halogen) H11LL
* Headlamp low beam (HID) D3S
Sidemarker - front 168
Park lamp - front (HI Series) WY5W
Park lamp - front (Low Series) 194
Turn lamp - front (HI Series) WY21W
Turn lamp - front (Low Series) W21W
Fog lamps H10 (9145)
Tail/brake lamp 3157K
Turn lamp - rear T20
Backup lamp 921
License plate lamp W5W
231

Maintenance
Function Trade number
* High-mount brake lamp LED

* Interior lamps LED
* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.

To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
232

Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR 1. Loosen the four fasteners and remove
the air cleaner assembly lid.
FILTER
2. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
WARNING
3. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage cleaner assembly to make sure no dirt
and personal burn injuries do not gets in the engine and to make sure you
start your engine with the air cleaner have a good seal.
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use

only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
268).
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enter the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 344).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
1.6L and 2.0L EcoBoost Engines
E170433
4. Install the new air filter element. Slide

the open end of the air filter element
in first, below the tab. Then push the
closed end of the air filter into the
bottom of the tray. The closed end
should fit inside the groove in the tray.
The tab of the closed end of the air
filter should be oriented down and fit
between the forks on the tray as shown
at the arrow above.
E171370
233

Maintenance
Note: Make sure you align the tab in the air

filter element with the fork in the air cleaner
assembly tray.
5. Install the air cleaner assembly lid and
tighten the four fasteners.
2.5L Engine
E142711
1. Detach the 2 clips that secure the air

filter cover to the housing.
2. Carefully remove the air filter cover
from the housing. Do not detach any
connections or tubes from the cover.
3. Remove the air cleaner from the
housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure that
no dirt gets into the engine.
5. Load the air filter into the housing.
6. Replace the air filter cover and secure
the clips.
234

Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING PRODUCTS

Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has For best results, use the following products
many quality products available to clean or products of equivalent quality:
your vehicle and protect its finishes.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover -
ZC-42
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner -
ZC-15
Motorcraft® Detail Wash ESR-M14P4-A
ZC-3-A
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.) -
ZC-20 (U.S.)
Engine Shampoo -
Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner -
ZC-56
Multi-Purpose Cleaner -
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with WSS-M14P19-A
Bitterant (U.S.)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner -
ZC-54
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.) -
ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A
ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner -
ZC-37-A
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH • Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft to the touch, or during strong or direct
Detail Wash. sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
235

Vehicle Care
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird • Do not use water pressure higher than
droppings, insect deposits and road tar. 2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
These may cause damage to your • Do not use water hotter than 179°F
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. (82°C).
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover. • Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a • Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
car wash. distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
substances come in contact with your at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as damage graphics and cause the edges to
possible. peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Exterior Chrome Parts Underbody
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product Flush the complete underside of your

to bumpers and other chrome parts. vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. drain holes free of debris or foreign
We recommend Motorcraft Custom material.
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to WAXING
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
than the time recommended. car's paint from the elements. We
• Using other non-recommended recommend that you wash and wax the
cleaners can result in severe and painted surface once or twice a year.
permanent cosmetic damage. When washing and waxing, park your
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
example steel wool or plastic pads as they sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
can scratch the chrome surface. applying wax.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal • Use a quality wax that does not contain
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers. abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
Exterior Plastic Parts to apply and remove the wax.
For routine cleaning we recommend • Apply a small amount of wax in a
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)

Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
236

Vehicle Care
• Do not allow wax to come in contact • Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
with any non-body (low-gloss black) spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
colored trim. The wax will discolor or the area in and around these locations.
stain the parts over time. • Cover the battery, power distribution
• Roof racks. box, and air filter assembly to prevent
• Bumpers. water damage when cleaning the
engine.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
• Mirror housings.
WIPER BLADES
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas. Car wash chemicals and environmental
• After waxing, your car's paint should fallout can result in windshield and wiper
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
smudges. wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
CLEANING THE ENGINE performance.
Engines are more efficient when they are To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep • Clean the windshield with a
the engine warmer than normal. non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
When washing: avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
• Take care when using a power washer instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
to clean the engine. The high-pressure any glass cleaner off these surfaces
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts immediately.
and cause damage. • For windshields contaminated with
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
water to avoid cracking the engine the entire windshield using steel wool
block or other engine components. (no greater than 0000 grade) in a
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and circular motion and rinse with water.
Degreaser on all parts that require • Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine concentrate.
Shampoo.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it sharp objects to clean or remove decals
is hot or running; water in the running from the inside of the heated rear window.
engine may cause internal damage. The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
237

Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INTERIOR CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT

PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
WARNINGS
CLUSTER LENS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,
WARNING
as these actions may weaken the
belt webbing. Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
On vehicles equipped with
steering wheel or instrument panel
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
to avoid contamination of the airbag
chemical solvents or strong
system.
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a Note: Follow the same procedure as
collision. cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
(page 239).
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a Clean the instrument panel and cluster
vacuum cleaner. lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
• Remove light stains and soil with these areas.
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner. • Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
• If grease or tar is present on the instrument panel. The dull finish in this
material, spot-clean the area first with area helps protect you from
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In undesirable windshield reflection.
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner. • Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot may damage the finish of the
cleaning, clean the entire area instrument panel, interior trim and
immediately (but do not oversaturate) cluster lens.
or the ring will set.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
• Do not use household cleaning have been in contact with certain
products or glass cleaners, which can products such as insect repellent and
stain and discolor the fabric and affect suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
the flame retardant abilities of the seat to the interior painted surfaces.
materials.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
238

Vehicle Care
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, You should:

soft cloth as quickly as possible. • Remove dust and loose dirt with a
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and vacuum cleaner.
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially • Clean and treat spills and stains as
available leather cleaning product for soon as possible.
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous Do not use the following products as these
area. may damage the leather:
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a • Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and leather conditioners.
water solution. Dry the area with a • Household cleaners.
clean, soft cloth. • Alcohol solutions.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and • Solvents or cleaners intended
water solution or cleaning product to specifically for rubber, vinyl and
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the plastics.
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing DAMAGE
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area. Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Equipped)
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
Note: Follow the same procedure as a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather Remover to remove particles such as bird
instrument panels and leather interior trim droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
surfaces. spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with Always read the instructions before using
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and cleaning products.
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth. CLEANING THE ALLOY
For cleaning and removing stains such as WHEELS (If Equipped)
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
commercially available leather cleaning warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on cause damage to the finish on your wheel
an inconspicuous area. rims and covers.
239

Vehicle Care
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty General

cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear • Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
away the clear coat finish over a period time. place.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based • Protect from sunlight, if possible.
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel • If vehicles are stored outside, they
wool, fuels or strong household detergents. require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the Body
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
This will reduce the risk of increased remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
corrosion of the brake discs. exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated and the underside of front fenders.
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain • Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
their condition we recommend that you: stored in exposed locations.
• Clean the wheels weekly using • Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. prevent rust.
Apply using manufacturer's • Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
instructions. with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
• Use a sponge to remove heavy discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
deposits of dirt and brake dust when you wash your vehicle.
accumulation. • Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream compartment hinges and latches with
of water when you have completed the a light grade oil.
cleaning process. • Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• To remove tar and grease, use • Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. solvents.
Engine
VEHICLE STORAGE
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 storage because used engine oil
days or more, read the following contains contaminates which may
maintenance recommendations to make cause engine damage.
sure your vehicle stays in good operating • Start the engine every 15 days for a
condition. minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
We engineer and test all motor vehicles with the climate controls set to defrost
and their components for reliable, regular until the engine reaches normal
driving. Under various conditions, operating temperature.
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
240

Vehicle Care
• With your foot on the brake, shift Miscellaneous

through all the gears while the engine
is running. • Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
• We recommend that you change the with grease to prevent rust.
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again. • Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
Fuel system and prevent corrosion.
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel Removing Vehicle From Storage
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle. When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
Cooling system • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
surfaces.
• When removing your vehicle from
• Check windshield wipers for any
storage, check coolant fluid level.
deterioration.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the • Check under the hood for any foreign
recommended level. material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
Battery nests.
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep • Check the exhaust for any foreign
connections clean. material that may have collected
during storage.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, • Check tire pressures and set tire
we recommend that you disconnect inflation per the Tire Label.
the battery cables to maintain battery • Check brake pedal operation. Drive
charge for quick starting. your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected. • Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
Brakes leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
• If you remove the battery, clean the
release fully.
battery cable ends and check for
Tires damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
• Maintain recommended air pressure. any concerns or issues.
241

Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION Notice to utility vehicle and truck

owners
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your WARNINGS
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the Utility vehicles have a significantly
tires from that fitted at the factory, the higher rollover rate than other types
speedometer may not display the correct of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized serious injury or death from a rollover or
Ford dealer to have the system other crash you must avoid sharp turns and
reprogrammed. If you intend to change the abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for
size of the wheels from that fitted by the the conditions, keep tires inflated to Ford
manufacturer, you can check the suitability recommended pressures, never overload
with an authorized dealer. or improperly load your vehicle, and make
sure every passenger is properly restrained.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires In a rollover crash, an unbelted
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire person is significantly more likely to
Care (page 245). die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and
The Ford recommended tire inflation children/infants must use appropriate
pressures can be found on the Tire Label, restraints to minimize the risk of injury or
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge ejection.
of the driver's door. This information can
also be found on the Safety Compliance Do not become overconfident in the
Certification Label (affixed to either the ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
door edge that meets the door last post; may accelerate better than a two-wheel
next to the driver’s seating position). drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
Ford strongly recommends maintaining vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
these tire pressures at all times. Failure to
follow the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear patterns,
reduced fuel economy, and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire E145298
size combination (if equipped).
242

Wheels and Tires
Utility vehicles and trucks handle On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
differently than passenger cars in the initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
various driving conditions that are drive while the vehicle is moving can cause
encountered on streets, highways and a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not These sounds are normal and are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high cause for concern.
as passenger cars any more than low-slung For four-wheel drive vehicles, a spare tire
sports cars are designed to perform of a different size other than the tire
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. provided should never be used. A dissimilar
Study your owner's manual and any spare tire size (other than the spare tire
supplements for specific information about provided) or major dissimilar tire sized
equipment features, instructions for safe between the front and rear axles could
driving and additional precautions to cause the four-wheel drive system to stop
reduce the risk of an accident or serious functioning and default to front-wheel
injury. drive. See Principle of Operation (page
140).
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)
How your vehicle differs from
WARNING other vehicles
Do not become overconfident in the Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. from some other vehicles in a few
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive

(when selected) has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power transfer
unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you
to select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel
Drive (page 140). For information on
transfer case maintenance, See
Maintenance (page 213). You should
become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your
vehicle.
243

Wheels and Tires
E145299 E168583
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying As a result of the above dimensional

capacity and to allow it to travel over differences, Sport utility vehicles and
rough terrain without getting hung up trucks often will have a higher center of
or damaging underbody components. gravity and a greater difference in center
• Shorter - to give it the capability to of gravity between the loaded and
approach inclines and drive over the unloaded condition. These differences that
crest of a hill without getting hung up make your vehicle so versatile also make
or damaging underbody components. it handle differently than an ordinary
All other things held equal, a shorter passenger car.
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
244

Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE U.S. Department of

Transportation Tire quality
Information About Uniform grades: The U.S. Department of
Tire Quality Grading Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
E142542
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
Tire Quality Grades apply to new would wear 1½ times as well on
pneumatic passenger car tires. the government course as a tire
The Quality grades can be found graded 100. The relative
where applicable on the tire performance of tires depends
sidewall between tread shoulder upon the actual conditions of their
and maximum section width. For use, however, and may depart
example: Treadwear 200 significantly from the norm due to
Traction AA Temperature A. variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
These Tire Quality Grades are characteristics and climate.
determined by standards that the
United States Department of Traction AA A B C
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new WARNING
pneumatic passenger car tires. The traction grade assigned
They do not apply to deep tread, to this tire is based on
winter-type snow tires, straight-ahead braking traction
space-saver or temporary use tests, and does not include
spare tires, light truck or LT type acceleration, cornering,
tires, tires with nominal rim hydroplaning or peak traction
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or characteristics.
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
245

Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
grades represent the tire’s ability represent higher levels of
to stop on wet pavement as performance on the laboratory
measured under controlled test wheel than the minimum
conditions on specified required by law.
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire Glossary of Tire Terminology
marked C may have poor traction *Tire label: A label showing the
performance. original equipment tire sizes,
Temperature A B C recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
WARNING vehicle can carry.
The temperature grade for *Tire Identification Number
this tire is established for a (TIN): A number on the sidewall
tire that is properly inflated and of each tire providing information
not overloaded. Excessive speed, about the tire brand and
underinflation, or excessive manufacturing plant, tire size and
loading, either separately or in date of manufacture. Also referred
combination, can cause heat to as DOT code.
buildup and possible tire failure. *Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C, *Standard load: A class of
representing the tire’s resistance P-metric or Metric tires designed
to the generation of heat and its to carry a maximum load at set
ability to dissipate heat when pressure. For example: For
tested under controlled conditions P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or
on a specified indoor laboratory 36 psi (2.5 bar) depending on tires
test wheel. Sustained high size and for Metric tires 36 psi
temperature can cause the (2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
material of the tire to degenerate pressure beyond this pressure will
and reduce tire life, and excessive not increase the tire’s load
temperature can lead to sudden carrying capability.
tire failure. The grade C *Extra load: A class of P-metric
corresponds to a level of or Metric tires designed to carry a
performance which all passenger heavier maximum load at 42 psi
car tires must meet under the (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
246

Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of Information Contained on the

air pressure. Tire Sidewall
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a Both United States and Canada
standard unit of air pressure. Federal regulations require tire
*Cold tire pressure: The tire manufacturers to place
pressure when the vehicle has standardized information on the
been stationary and out of direct sidewall of all tires. This
sunlight for an hour or more and information identifies and
prior to the vehicle being driven for describes the fundamental
1 mi (1.6 km). characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
*Recommended inflation Identification Number for safety
pressure: The cold inflation standard certification and in case
pressure found on the Safety of a recall.
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge Information on P Type Tires
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch E
post, next to the driver's seating C D F
position), or Tire Label located on G
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
B
H
driver door.
A
* B-pillar: The structural member I
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim. J
M
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
L
K
the perimeter of the tire that E142543
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle. P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) rating. The definitions of these
for a tire or a tire and tube items are listed below. (Note that
assembly upon which the tire the tire size, load index and speed
beads are seated. rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
247

Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated G. H: Indicates the tire's speed

by the Tire and Rim Association, rating. The speed rating denotes
that may be used for service on the speed at which a tire is
cars, sport utility vehicles, designed to be driven for extended
minivans and light trucks. Note: If periods of time under a standard
your tire size does not begin with condition of load and inflation
a letter this may mean it is pressure. The tires on your vehicle
designated by either the European may operate at different
Tire and Rim Technical conditions for load and inflation
Organization or the Japan Tire pressure. These speed ratings may
Manufacturing Association. need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
B. 215: Indicates the nominal ratings range from 81 mph
width of the tire in millimeters (130 km/h) to 186 mph
from sidewall edge to sidewall (299 km/h). These ratings are
edge. In general, the larger the listed in the following chart.
number, the wider the tire.
Note: You may not find this
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio information on all tires because it
which gives the tire's ratio of is not required by federal law.
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. Letter Speed rating
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim rating
diameter in inches. If you change M 81 mph (130 km/h)
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the N 87 mph (140 km/h)
new wheel diameter.
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to R 106 mph (171 km/h)
how much weight a tire can carry. S 112 mph (180 km/h)
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not, T 118 mph (190 km/h)
contact a local tire dealer.
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it H 130 mph (210 km/h)
is not required by federal law. V 149 mph (240 km/h)
248

Wheels and Tires
Letter Speed rating J. Tire Ply Composition and

rating Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
W 168 mph (270 km/h) layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
Y 186 mph (299 km/h) manufacturers also must indicate
Note: For tires with a maximum the ply materials in the tire and the
speed capability over 149 mph sidewall, which include steel,
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers nylon, polyester, and others.
sometimes use the letters ZR. For K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
those with a maximum speed maximum load in kilograms and
capability over 186 mph (299 pounds that can be carried by the
km/h), tire manufacturers always tire. See the Safety Compliance
use the letters ZR. Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification door-latch post, or the door edge
Number (TIN): This begins with that meets the door-latch post,
the letters DOT and indicates that next to the driver's seating
the tire meets all federal position), for the correct tire
standards. The next two numbers pressure for your vehicle.
or letters are the plant code L. Treadwear, Traction and
designating where it was Temperature Grades:
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four *Treadwear The treadwear grade
numbers represent the week and is a comparative rating based on
year the tire was built. For the wear rate of the tire when
example, the numbers 317 mean tested under controlled conditions
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, on a specified government test
the numbers go to four digits. For course. For example, a tire graded
example, 2501 means the 25th 150 would wear one and one-half
week of 2001. The numbers in times as well on the government
between are identification codes course as a tire graded 100.
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
249

Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades, The tire suppliers may have

from highest to lowest are AA, A, additional markings, notes or
B, and C. The grades represent the warnings such as standard load
tire's ability to stop on wet or radial tubeless.
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified Additional Information
government test surfaces of Contained on the Tire Sidewall
asphalt and concrete. A tire for LT Type Tires
marked C may have poor traction Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
performance. apply to this type of tire.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and B
C, representing the tire's C
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate A
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation D
B
pressure which can be found on E142544
the Safety Compliance LT type tires have some additional

Certification Label (affixed to information beyond those of P
either the door hinge pillar, type tires; these differences are
door-latch post, or the door edge described below.
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
position), or Tire Label which is by the Tire and Rim Association,
located on the B-Pillar or the edge that is intended for service on light
of the driver’s door. The cold trucks.
inflation pressure should never be B. Load Range and Load
set lower than the recommended Inflation Limits: Indicates the
pressure on the vehicle label. tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
250

Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)

at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual, B C D
defined as four tires on the rear E
axle (a total of six or more tires on A
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
E142545
T type tires have some additional

information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
251

Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio WARNING

which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or Under-inflation is the most
lower indicate a short sidewall. common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. cracking, tread separation, or
R: Indicates a radial type tire. blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim of injury. Under-inflation increase
diameter in inches. If you change sidewall flexing and rolling
your wheel size, you will have to resistance, resulting in heat
purchase new tires to match the build-up and internal damage to
new wheel diameter. the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
Recommended Tire Pressures wear, loss of vehicle control, and
and Inflating Your Tires accidents. A tire can lose up to
Safe operation of your vehicle half of its air pressure and not
requires that your tires are appear flat.
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air You are strongly urged to buy a
pressure without appearing flat. reliable tire pressure gauge, as
Every day before you drive, check automatic service station gauges
your tires. If one looks lower than may be inaccurate. Ford
the others, use a tire gauge to recommends the use of a digital
check the pressure of all tires and or dial-type tire pressure gauge
adjust if required. rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge. Use the
At least once a month and before recommended cold inflation
long trips, inspect each tire and pressure for optimum tire
check the tire pressure with a tire performance and wear.
gauge (including spare, if Under-inflation or over-inflation
equipped). Inflate all tires to the may cause uneven treadwear
inflation pressure recommended patterns.
by Ford Motor Company.
252

Wheels and Tires
Always inflate your tires to the is suspected, have the tire

Ford recommended inflation demounted and inspected in case
pressure even if it is less than the it needs to be repaired or replaced.
maximum inflation pressure For your safety, tires that are
information found on the tire. You damaged or show signs of
will find a Tire Label containing excessive wear should not be used
the Ford recommended tire because they are more likely to
inflation pressure by the tire size blow out or fail.
and other important information Improper or inadequate vehicle
located on the B-Pillar or the edge maintenance can cause tires to
of the driver’s door. wear abnormally. Inspect all your
The Ford recommended tire tires, including the spare,
inflation pressure is also found on frequently, and replace them if
the Safety Compliance one or more of the following
Certification Label (affixed to conditions exist:
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge Tire Wear
that meets the door-latch on the
B-pillar, or on the edge of the
driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems E142546
Periodically inspect the tire treads When the tread is worn down to
for uneven or excessive wear and one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
remove objects such as stones, tires must be replaced to help
nails or glass that may be wedged prevent your vehicle from skidding
in the tread grooves. Check the tire and hydroplaning. Built-in
and valve stems for holes, cracks, treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
or cuts that may permit air which look like narrow strips of
leakage and repair or replace the smooth rubber across the tread
tire and replace the valve stem. will appear on the tire when the
Inspect the tire sidewalls for tread is worn down to one
cracking, cuts, bruises and other sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
253

Wheels and Tires
When the tire tread wears down Age

to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must WARNING
be replaced. Tires degrade over time
Damage depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
Periodically inspect the tire treads conditions, and conditions of use
and sidewalls for damage (such (load, speed, inflation pressure)
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, the tires experience throughout
cracks in the tread groove and their lives.
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed In general, tires should be
or suspected, have the tire replaced after six years regardless
inspected by a tire professional. of tread wear. However, heat
Tires can be damaged during caused by hot climates or
off-road use, so inspection after frequent high loading conditions
off-road use is also can accelerate the aging process
recommended. and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire

when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification

Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
254

Wheels and Tires
This begins with the letters DOT WARNINGS

and indicates that the tire meets is located on the B-Pillar or edge
all federal standards. The next of the driver’s door. If this
two numbers or letters are the information is not found on these
plant code designating where it labels then you should contact
was manufactured, the next two your authorized dealer as soon as
are the tire size code and the last possible. Use of any tire or wheel
four numbers represent the week not recommended by Ford can
and year the tire was built. For affect the safety and performance
example, the numbers 317 mean of your vehicle, which could result
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, in an increased risk of loss of
the numbers go to four digits. For vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
example, 2501 means the 25th personal injury and death.
week of 2001. The numbers in Additionally the use of
between are identification codes non-recommended tires and
used for traceability. This wheels could cause steering,
information is used to contact suspension, axle, transfer case or
customers if a tire defect requires power transfer unit failure. If you
a recall. have questions regarding tire
Tire Replacement replacement, contact your
Requirements authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Your vehicle is equipped with tires To reduce the risk of serious
designed to provide a safe ride injury, when mounting
and handling capability. replacement tires and wheels, you
WARNINGS should not exceed the maximum
Only use replacement tires pressure indicated on the sidewall
and wheels that are the same of the tire to set the beads without
size, load index, speed rating and additional precautions listed
type (such as P-metric versus below. If the beads do not seat at
LT-metric or all-season versus the maximum pressure indicated,
all-terrain) as those originally re-lubricate and try again.
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size When inflating the tire for
may be found on either the Safety mounting pressures up to 20 psi
Compliance Certification Label (1.38 bar) greater than the
(affixed to either the door hinge maximum pressure on the tire
pillar, door-latch post, or the door sidewall, the following
edge that meets the door-latch precautions must be taken to
post, next to the driver's seating protect the person mounting the
position), or the Tire Label which tire:
255

Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS The use of wheels or tires not

1. Make sure that you have the recommended by Ford Motor
correct tire and wheel size. Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
2. Lubricate the tire bead and monitoring system.
wheel bead seat area again. If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet system is malfunctioning. Your
(3.66 meters) away from the replacement tire might be
wheel and tire assembly. incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
4. Use both eye and ear some component of the system
protection. may be damaged.
For a mounting pressure more Safety Practices
than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than
the maximum pressure, a Ford WARNINGS
dealer or other tire service If your vehicle is stuck in
professional should do the snow, mud, or sand, do not
mounting. rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
Always inflate steel carcass tires an explosion. A tire can explode in
with a remote air fill with the as little as three to five seconds.
person inflating standing at a Do not spin the wheels at
minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) over 35 mph (56 km/h). The
away from the wheel and tire tires may fail and injure a
assembly. passenger or bystander.
Important: Remember to replace Driving habits have a great deal

the wheel valve stems when the to do with your tire mileage and
road tires are replaced on your safety.
vehicle.
It is recommended that the two *Observe posted speed limits
front tires or two rear tires *Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
generally be replaced as a pair.
*Avoid potholes and objects on
The tire pressure sensors mounted the road
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed *Do not run over curbs or hit the
to be used in aftermarket wheels. tire against a curb when parking
256

Wheels and Tires
Highway Hazards Wheel misalignment in the front

or the rear can cause uneven and
No matter how carefully you drive, rapid treadwear of your tires and
there is always the possibility that should be corrected by an
you may eventually have a flat tire authorized dealer. Front-wheel
on the highway. Drive slowly to the drive vehicles and those with an
closest safe area out of traffic. independent rear suspension (if
This may further damage the flat equipped) may require alignment
tire, but your safety is more of all four wheels.
important.
The tires should also be balanced
If you feel a sudden vibration or periodically. An unbalanced tire
ride disturbance while driving, or and wheel assembly may result in
you suspect your tire or vehicle irregular tire wear.
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with Tire Rotation
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the Note: If your tires show uneven
tires for damage. If a tire is wear, ask an authorized dealer to
under-inflated or damaged, check for and correct any wheel
deflate it, remove wheel and misalignment, tire imbalance or
replace it with your spare tire and mechanical problem involved
wheel. If you cannot detect a before tire rotation.
cause, have the vehicle towed to Note: Your vehicle may be
the nearest repair facility or tire equipped with a dissimilar spare
dealer to have the vehicle wheel and tire assembly. A
inspected. dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
Tire and Wheel Alignment wheel and tire assembly that is
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or different in brand, size or
pothole can cause the front end appearance from the road tires and
of your vehicle to become wheels. If you have a dissimilar
misaligned or cause damage to spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
your tires. If your vehicle seems to intended for temporary use only
pull to one side when you are and should not be used in a tire
driving, the wheels may be out of rotation.
alignment. Have an authorized Note: After having your tires
dealer check the wheel alignment rotated, inflation pressure must be
periodically. checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
257

Wheels and Tires
Rotating your tires at the The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
recommended interval (as treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
indicated in the Scheduled However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
Maintenance chapter) will help to use cables, it is recommended that steel
your tires wear more evenly, wheels (of the same size and
providing better tire performance specifications) be used, as cables may chip
and longer tire life. Sometimes aluminum wheels.
irregular tire wear can be Follow these guidelines when using snow
corrected by rotating the tires. tires and traction devices
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions.
• Use 10 mm cables or chains only on
front axle with 235/55R17 tires.
• Not all S-class snow chains or cables
meet these restrictions. Chains of this
size restriction will include a tensioning
device.
E142547
• The snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the front axle.
USING SNOW CHAINS • Do not use chains or cables on
235/50R18 and 235/45R19 tires.
WARNING • Install cables securely, verifying that
Snow tires must be the same size, the cables do not touch any wiring,
load index, speed rating as those brake lines or fuel lines.
originally provided by Ford. Use of • When driving with tire cables do not
any tire or wheel not recommended by exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
Ford can affect the safety and maximum speed recommended by the
performance of your vehicle, which could chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and • Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
death. Additionally, the use of rub or bang against the vehicle, stop
non-recommended tires and wheels could and retighten them. If this does not
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer work, remove the cables to prevent
case or power transfer unit failure. vehicle damage.
• Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use cables on
dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
258

Wheels and Tires
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
SYSTEM it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
WARNING has not reached the level to trigger
The tire pressure monitoring system illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
is not a substitute for manually telltale.
checking tire pressure. The tire Your vehicle has also been equipped with
pressure should be checked periodically a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
(at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see when the system is not operating properly.
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure The TPMS malfunction indicator is
to properly maintain your tire pressure combined with the low tire pressure
could increase the risk of tire failure, loss telltale. When the system detects a
of control, vehicle rollover and personal malfunction, the telltale will flash for
injury. approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
Each tire, including the spare (if will continue upon subsequent vehicle
provided), should be checked start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
monthly when cold and inflated When the malfunction indicator is
to the inflation pressure recommended by illuminated, the system may not be able
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle to detect or signal low tire pressure as
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
your vehicle has tires of a different size for a variety of reasons, including the
than the size indicated on the vehicle installation of replacement or alternate
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
should determine the proper tire inflation the TPMS from functioning properly.
pressure for those tires.) Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
As an added safety feature, your vehicle wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure replacement or alternate tires and wheels
Monitoring System (TPMS) that allow the TPMS to continue to function
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale properly.
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, The tire pressure monitoring system
when the low tire pressure telltale complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
illuminates, you should stop and check with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate Operation is subject to the following two
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a conditions: (1) This device may not cause
significantly under-inflated tire causes the harmful interference, and (2) This device
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. must accept any interference received,
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency including interference that may cause
and tire tread life, and may affect the undesired operation.
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
259

Wheels and Tires
Changing Tires With a Tire Understanding Your Tire Pressure

Pressure Monitoring System Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
pressure sensor located inside the wheel Installed
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure When one of your road tires needs to be
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The replaced with the temporary spare, the
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is system will continue to identify an issue to
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take remind you that the damaged road wheel
care when changing the tire to avoid and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
damaging the sensor put back on your vehicle.
You should always have your tires serviced To restore the full function of the tire
by an authorized dealer. pressure monitoring system, have the
Check the tire pressure periodically (at damaged road wheel and tire assembly
least monthly) using an accurate tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter. When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
260

Wheels and Tires
Low tire pressure Possible cause Customer action required

warning light
Solid warning light Tire(s) under-inflated Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Flashing warning Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
light assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
It may take up to two minutes of driving

When Inflating Your Tires over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
When putting air into your tires (such as at off after you have filled your tires to the
a gas station or in your garage), the tire recommended inflation pressure
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
261

Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
Pressure indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
The tire pressure monitoring system the monitoring system, all road wheels
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic equipped with tire pressure monitoring
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
vehicle is stationary overnight with the decrease your speed. Hold the steering
outside temperature significantly lower wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
than the daytime temperature, the tire place on the side of the road.
pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21 Have a flat serviced by an authorized
kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient dealer in order to prevent damage to the
temperature. This lower pressure value tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
may be detected by the tire pressure See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
monitoring system as being significantly (page 259). Replace the spare tire with a
lower than the recommended inflation road tire as soon as possible. During
pressure and activate the system warning repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check pressure monitoring system sensor for
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one damage.
or more tires are flat, repair as necessary.
Check the air pressure in the road tires. If Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive Assembly Information
the vehicle to the nearest location where
air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the WARNING
tires to the recommended inflation
Failure to follow these guidelines
pressure.
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
WARNINGS tire, then it is intended for temporary use
The use of tire sealant may damage only. This means that if you need to use it,
your tire pressure monitoring system you should replace it as soon as possible
and should only be used in roadside with a road wheel and tire assembly that
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the is the same size and type as the road tires
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be and wheels that were originally provided
used. The tire pressure monitoring system by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must is damaged, it should be replaced rather
be replaced by an authorized dealer after than repaired.
use of the sealant. A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
See Tire Pressure Monitoring is defined as a spare wheel and tire
System (page 259). If the tire assembly that is different in brand, size or
pressure monitor sensor becomes appearance from the road tires and wheels
damaged, it will no longer function. and can be one of three types:
262

Wheels and Tires
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire • Use commercial car washing

begins with the letter T for tire size and equipment.
may have Temporary Use Only molded in • Use snow chains on the end of the
the sidewall. vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label and tire assembly.
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND wheel and tire assembly can lead to
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE impairment of the following:
ONLY.
• Handling, stability and braking
When driving with one of the dissimilar performance.
spare tires listed above, do not:
• Comfort and noise.
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). • Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum • Winter weather driving capability.
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label. • Wet weather driving capability.
• Tow a trailer. • All-wheel driving capability
• Use snow chains on the end of the When driving with the full-size dissimilar
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire. spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time. • Towing a trailer.
• Use commercial car washing • Driving vehicles equipped with a
equipment. camper body.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire. • Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can Drive cautiously when using a full-size
lead to impairment of the following: dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
• Handling, stability and braking
performance. Tire Change Procedure
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs. WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
• Winter weather driving capability.
the ground, the transmission alone
• Wet weather driving capability. will not prevent your vehicle from
• All-wheel driving capability moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
When driving with the full-size dissimilar sure to place the transmission in park
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not: (P) or neutral (N), set the parking brake,
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). and block (in both directions) the wheel
• Use more than one dissimilar spare that is diagonally opposite (other side and
wheel and tire assembly at a time. end of your vehicle) to the tire being
changed.
263

Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS 5. Remove the jack from the foam holder.

Never get underneath a vehicle that The lug wrench is located in the left
is supported only by a jack. If the side storage foam next to the spare
vehicle slips off the jack, you or tire. Remove the flat tire retainer strap
someone else could be seriously injured. from the jack base.
Do not attempt to change a tire on

the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications. E142551
6. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.

Note: Passengers should not remain in your 7. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. turn counterclockwise, but do not
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking remove them until the wheel is raised
brake and activate the hazard flashers. off the ground.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and Note: Jack at the specified locations to
turn the engine off. avoid damage to the vehicle.
3. Remove the carpeted wheel cover. 8. The vehicle jacking points are shown
4. Remove the wing nut that secures the here, and are depicted on the warning
spare tire by turning it label on the jack.
counterclockwise.
E145908
9. Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills

show the location of the jacking points.
E160855
264

Wheels and Tires
13. Remove the jack and fully tighten the

lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
266).
Stowing the flat tire

1. Put the jack and lug wrench away.
Make sure the jack is fastened so it
does not rattle when you drive.
2. Unblock the wheels.
3. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the
E162190
cargo area. Secure with the flat tire
10. Remove the lug nuts with the lug retainer strap by following the next
wrench. steps:
Note: If equipped with full wheel covers
with exposed wheel nuts, remove the wheel
nuts prior to removing the wheel cover or
damage to the wheel cover may occur.
11. Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered.
12. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise. E142906
4. Locate the cargo tie-down near the

seatback. Push the loop of the retainer
strap through the tie-down. Thread the
1 non-loop end through the loop.
3 4
5 2
E75442
E157926
265

Wheels and Tires
5. Weave the retainer strap through the 6. Locate the front cargo tie-down at the
wheel openings. opposite corner of the cargo area to
the tie-down used in Step 4. Thread
the retainer strap through the tie-down
and pull tight.
7. Secure by tying a 2-half hitch knot.
E143746
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Bolt size Ib-ft (Nm)

*
M12 x 1.5 100 (135)

*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
266

Wheels and Tires
E145950
A Wheel pilot bore.

Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
267

Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 1.6L ECOBOOST™
Engine Component 1.6L EcoBoost Engine
Cubic inches 98
Required fuel Minimum 87 octane
Compression ratio 10.0:1
Spark plug gap 0.027 - 0.031 in. (0.70 - 0.80 mm)
Drivebelt Routing
1.6L Ecoboost engine
E161372
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Engine Component 2.0L EcoBoost Engine
Cubic inches 122

268

Drivebelt Routing A. The long drivebelt is on the first

pulley groove closest to the
engine.
A B. The short drivebelt is on the
second pulley groove farthest
from engine.
B
E161383
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L
Engine Component 2.5L Engine
Cubic inches 152

269

Drivebelt Routing A. The long drivebelt is on the first

pulley groove closest to the
engine.
A B. The short drivebelt is on the
second pulley groove farthest
from the engine.
B
E161383
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 1.6L ECOBOOST™
Component 1.6L EcoBoost Engine
Air filter element FA-1908

Oil filter FL-910-S
Battery BXT-96R-590
Spark plugs SP-532
Cabin air filter FP-70
Windshield wiper blade WW-2750 (driver side)
WW-2705 (passenger side)
WW-1106 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at

fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals.
270

MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Component 2.0L EcoBoost Engine

Oil filter FL-910-S
Battery BXT-96R-590
Spark plugs SP-537

271

MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.5L
Component 2.5L Engine

Oil filter FL-910-S
Battery BXT-96R-590
Spark plugs SP-530

272

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142477
A World manufacturer identifier

B Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
C Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D Engine type
E142476 E Check digit
F Model year
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification G Assembly plant
number. H Production sequence number
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
273

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION TRANSMISSION CODE

LABEL DESIGNATION
E167469
E167814
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a The transmission code is on the Safety
Safety Compliance Certification Label be Compliance Certification Label. The
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where following table shows the transmission
the Safety Compliance Certification Label code along with the transmission
may be located. The Safety Compliance description.
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
Description Code
Six-speed automatic transmission 6F35 6
274

CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 1.6L ECOBOOST™

Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item Capacity
Engine oil (with oil filter) 4.3 qt (4.1 L)

Engine coolant 11.1 qt (10.5 L)
Brake fluid Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir
Rear differential fluid 2.4 pt (1.15 L)
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid 17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)
Automatic transmission fluid 9.0 qt (8.5 L)
*
Windshield washer fluid Fill as required

Fuel tank 15.5 gal (58.7 L)
A/C refrigerant 24 oz (0.68 kg)
A/C refrigerant compressor oil 4.5 fl oz (133 ml)
*
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
Name Specification
Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C945-A

Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
Recommended motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C945-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Blend Motor
Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
Recommended motor oil (Mexico): WSS-M2C945-A
275

Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil

MXO-5W20-QSP
Optional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C945-A
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
Optional motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C945-A
CXO-5W20-LFS12
Engine coolant (U.S.): WSS-M97B44-D2
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
Engine coolant (Canada): WSS-M97B44-D2
CVC-3DIL-B
Engine coolant (Mexico): WSS-M97B44-D2
Motorcraft® Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Rear differential fluid (U.S.): WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Rear differential fluid (Canada): WSP-M2C197-A
CXY-80W90-1L
Rear differential fluid (Mexico): WSP-M2C197-A
MXY-80W90-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (Canada): WSL-M2C192-A
CXY-75W140-1L
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A
276

Name Specification
Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV

XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A
CXT-10-LV12
Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
Windshield washer fluid (Canada): WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
A/C refrigerant (U.S.): WSH-M17B19-A
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
A/C refrigerant (Canada): WSH-M17B19-A
CYN-16-R
A/C refrigerant (Mexico): WSH-M17B19-A
MYN-19
A/C refrigerant compressor oil: WSH-M1C231-B
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
Multi-purpose grease: ESB-M1C93-B
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
Lock cylinders (U.S.): --
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
Lock cylinders (Canada): --
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
Lock cylinders (Mexico): --
MXL-1
277

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet An oil that displays this symbol conforms
the defined specification and viscosity to current engine, emission system and
grade, this may lead to: fuel economy performance standards of
• Component damage which is not the International Lubricants Specification
covered by the vehicle warranty. Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
• Longer engine cranking periods. Do not use supplemental engine oil
• Increased emission levels.
and could lead to engine damage that may
• Reduced engine performance. not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
• Reduced fuel economy. Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
• Degraded brake performance. Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
of any fluid other than the recommended
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
fluid may cause degraded brake
available, use motor oils of the
performance and not meet the Ford
recommended viscosity grade that meet
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
API SN requirements and display the API
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
water, petroleum products or other
not use oil labeled with API SN service
materials may result in brake system
category unless the label also displays the
damage and possible failure.
API certification mark.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
E142732
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™

Capacities
WARNING
278

Item Capacity

Rear differential fluid 2.4 pt (1.15 L)
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid 17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)
*

*
Specifications
Materials
Name Specification

Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
MXO-5W30-QSP
XO-5W30-QFS
CXO-5W30-LFS12
279

Name Specification
Engine coolant (U.S.): WSS-M97B44-D2

VC-3DIL-B
CVC-3DIL-B
Engine coolant (Mexico): WSS-M97B44-D2
Motorcraft® Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
PM-20
Rear differential fluid (U.S.): WSP-M2C197-A
XY-80W90-QL
Rear differential fluid (Canada): WSP-M2C197-A
CXY-80W90-1L
Rear differential fluid (Mexico): WSP-M2C197-A
MXY-80W90-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSL-M2C192-A
XY-75W140-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (Canada): WSL-M2C192-A
CXY-75W140-1L
XT-10-QLVC
CXT-10-LV12
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
280

Name Specification

CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
YN-19
CYN-16-R
MYN-19
YN-12-D
XL-5
XL-1
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
MXL-1
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
the defined specification and viscosity
available, use motor oils of the
grade, this may lead to:
recommended viscosity grade that meet
• Component damage which is not API SN requirements and display the API
covered by the vehicle warranty. Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
• Longer engine cranking periods. not use oil labeled with API SN service
• Increased emission levels. category unless the label also displays the
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
281


not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
E142732 clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
An oil that displays this symbol conforms materials may result in brake system
to current engine, emission system and damage and possible failure.
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification Note: Automatic transmissions that require
Advisory Committee (ILSAC). MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L

Capacities
WARNING
Item Capacity

*

282

Item Capacity

*
Specifications
Materials
Name Specification

Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Blend Motor
Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
MXO-5W20-QSP
XO-5W20-QFS
CXO-5W20-LFS12
Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M97B44-D2
VC-3DIL-B
CVC-3DIL-B
PM-20
283

Name Specification

XT-10-QLVC
CXT-10-LV12
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
YN-19
CYN-16-R
MYN-19
YN-12-D
XL-5
XL-1
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
MXL-1
284

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
the defined specification and viscosity Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
grade, this may lead to: or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
• Component damage which is not of any fluid other than the recommended
covered by the vehicle warranty. fluid may cause degraded brake
• Longer engine cranking periods. performance standards. Keep brake fluid
• Increased emission levels. clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
• Reduced engine performance. water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
• Reduced fuel economy. damage and possible failure.
• Degraded brake performance.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
available, use motor oils of the use of any other fluid may cause
recommended viscosity grade that meet transmission damage.
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms

to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
285

Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION AM and FM frequencies are established by

the Federal Communications Commission
Radio Frequencies and Reception (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Factors Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or

CD and CD Player Information heat sources for extended periods.
Note: CD units play commercially pressed MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact Structure
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable Audio systems capable of recognizing and
compact discs may not function correctly playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
when used in Ford CD players. and folder structures work as follows:
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade • There are two different modes for MP3
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
as the label may peel and cause the CD to WMA track mode (system default) and
become jammed. You should use a MP3 and WMA folder mode.
permanent felt tip marker rather than • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please disc. The player numbers each MP3
contact an authorized dealer for further and WMA track on the disc (noted by
information. the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped T001 to a maximum of T255. The
discs or discs with a scratch protection film maximum number of playable MP3 and
attached. WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
Always handle discs by their edges only. model of radio present.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
286

Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents In track mode, the system displays and
a folder structure consisting of one plays the structure as if it were only one
level of folders. The CD player numbers level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc regardless of being in a specific folder). In
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file folder mode, the system only plays the
extension) and all folders containing MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through AM/FM/CD
the disc files.
WARNING
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how Driving while distracted can result in
the system reads the structures you create. loss of vehicle control, crash and
While various files may be present (files injury. We strongly recommend that
with extensions other than MP3 and you use extreme caution when using any
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA device that may take your focus off the
extension are played; other files are road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
ignored by the system. This enables you to operation of your vehicle. We recommend
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a against the use of any hand-held device
variety of tasks on your work computer, while driving and encourage the use of
home computer and your in-vehicle voice-operated systems when possible.
system. Make sure you are aware of all applicable
287

Audio System
E172881
A Eject: Press to eject a CD.

B Cursor arrows: Press to scroll through on-screen audio system choices, menus
or other on-screen functions.
C CD slot: Insert a CD.
D OK: Press to confirm menu selections.
E Clock: Press to set the time. Use the cursor arrows to set the hours and minutes.
Press OK to confirm the time. You can also set the clock by pressing MENU
and scrolling to Clock Settings.
F TUNE: Press to manually search the frequency band. Use the cursor arrows to
change the frequency.
G Number block: In radio mode, store your favorite radio stations. To store a
radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound
returns. In CD mode, press one of these buttons to select a track.
288

Audio System
H Seek forward: Press and release the right side of the control to go to the next
preset radio station or disc track. Press and hold this side of the control to fast
forward to the next strong radio station, memory preset or through the current
disc track.
I ON/OFF: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
J Seek reverse: Press and release the left side of the control to go to the previous
preset radio station or disc track. Press and hold this side of the control to
reverse to the previous strong radio station, memory preset or disc track.
K MENU: Press to access different audio system features. See Menu Structure
later in this section.
L INFO Press to access any available radio or media information.
M SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade or Balance.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you
make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the
settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set for
each audio source independently.
N MEDIA: Press to access LINE IN (auxiliary input jack) mode or CD or switch
between both media sources
O RADIO: Press to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies.
Note: You can operate your audio system

for up to one hour after you switch off the
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: ignition. Press the ON/OFF control to
AM/FM/CD/SYNC operate the system with the ignition turned
off. The system automatically turns off after
WARNING one hour.
289

Audio System
A B C D
E
O
N
M F
L
K G
H H
E162867 J I

B Cursor arrows: Press to scroll through the menu choices.
C OK: Press to confirm menu selections.
D INFO: Press to access more information depending upon the source selected.
E TUNE: In radio mode, press to manually search through the radio frequency
band.
F Number block: In radio mode, store and recall your favorite radio stations. To
store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button
until sound returns. In CD mode, select a track. In phone mode, enter a phone
number.
G CLOCK: If not in phone mode, press to display the clock.
H Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (for example Radio mode or CD mode).
290

Audio System
I Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
and press this button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In CD mode, press to select the previous or next track. Press and hold
to move quickly forward through the current track.
J VOL and Power: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
K MENU: Press to access different audio system features. See Menu Structure
later in this chapter.
L SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance.
M PHONE: Press to access the phone features of the SYNC system. See your
SYNC information.
N MEDIA: Press to open the media source menu. You can press this multiple
times to change to CD or to a SYNC-Media device or scroll through the media
sources using the arrow buttons. Press OK to select a source.
O RADIO: Press this multiple times to select a radio band. Press and hold to
select the autostore function. Press to return to the main screen of the active
radio band.
Note: You can operate your audio system

for up to one hour after you switch off the
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: ignition. Press the power control to operate
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE the system with the ignition turned off. The
RADIO system automatically turns off after one
hour.
WARNING Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
Driving while distracted can result in location. Check with an authorized dealer.
291

Audio System
A B C D
E
P
O
N F
M
L G
H H
E162869 K J I

B Cursor arrows: Press to scroll through the menu choices.
C OK: Press to confirm menu selections.
D INFO: Press to access more information depending upon the source selected.
E TUNE: In radio mode, press to manually search through the radio frequency
band.
F Number block: In radio mode, store and recall your favorite radio stations. To
store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button
until sound returns. In CD mode, select a track. In phone mode, enter a phone
number.
G Clock: If not in phone mode, press to display the clock.
H Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (for example Radio mode or CD mode).
292

Audio System
I Sound: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance.
J Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
and press either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In CD mode, press to select the previous or next track. Press and hold
to move quickly forward or backward through the current track.
K VOL and Power: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
L MENU: Press to access different audio system features. See Menu Structure
later in this chapter.
M PHONE: Press to access the phone features of the SYNC system. See your
SYNC information.
N MEDIA: Press to open the media source menu. You can press this multiple
times to change to CD or to a SYNC-Media device or scroll through the media
sources using the arrow buttons. Press OK to select a source.
O SIRIUS: Press to listen to SIRIUS satellite radio.
P RADIO: Press this multiple times to select a radio band. Press and hold to
select the autostore function. Press to return to the main screen of the active
radio band.
Note: The CD slot is directly above the

touchscreen.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
Note: The touchscreen system controls
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
WARNING
293

Audio System
E143843
A TUNE: In radio mode, press to manually search through the radio frequency
band.
B VOL and Power: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
C Eject: Press to eject a CD.
D Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
direction. In CD mode, press to select the next track. Press and hold to move
quickly forward through the current track.
E SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance.
F SOURCE: Press to access different audio modes, for example AM, FM and CD.
294

Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: Note: The CD slot is directly above the
touchscreen.
SONY AM/FM/CD
Note: The touchscreen system controls
WARNING most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
E143844
A Power: Press to switch the system on and off.

B SOURCE: Press to access different audio modes, for example AM, FM and CD.
295

Audio System
C Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If a specific category is selected (such as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous in the selected category. In CD mode, press to select
the previous or next track. Press and hold to move quickly forward through the
current track.
D TUNE: In radio mode, press to manually search through the radio frequency
band. In SIRIUS mode, press to find the previous or next available satellite radio
station.
E Volume: Turn to adjust the volume.
F SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance.
G Eject: Press to eject a CD.
The multicast indicator appears in FM

mode (only) if the current station is
DIGITAL RADIO broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not digital channels where new or different
available in all markets. content is available. HD1 signifies the main
HD Radio technology is the digital programming status and is available in
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your analog and digital broadcasts. Other
system has a special receiver that allows multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
it to receive digital broadcasts (where only available digitally.
available) in addition to the analog When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital can access the following functions:
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free, • Scan allows you to hear a brief
crystal-clear audio and no static or sampling of all available stations. This
distortion. For more information, and a feature still works when HD Radio
guide to available stations and reception is on, although it does not
programming, please visit scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
www.hdradio.com. see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology, • Memory presets allow you to save an
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your active channel as a memory preset.
screen. When this logo is available, you Touch and hold a memory preset slot
may also see Title and Artist fields until the sound returns. There is a brief
on-screen. mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
296

Audio System
Note: As with any saved radio station, you

cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible

experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
297

Audio System
Potential station issues
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
in audio. by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting HD2 or available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
HD3, multicast preset or broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 The previously stored No action required. The
multicast channel when multicast preset or direct station is not available in
recalling a preset or from a tune is not available in your your current location.
direct tune. current reception area.
Text information does not Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
match currently playing radio broadcaster. form at website listed
audio. below.
*
There is no text information Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. form at website listed
frequency. below.
*
HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables No action required. This is
when Scan is pressed. HD2-HD7 channel search. normal behavior.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor news, sports, weather, traffic and
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not entertainment satellite radio channels. For
responsible for the content sent using HD more information and a complete list of
Radio technology. Content may be SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit
changed, added or deleted at any time at www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
the station owner's discretion. www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS
at 1-888-539-7474.
298

Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos

real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence interference and the audio system may mute.
SIRIUS satellite radio is a

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right news, weather, traffic and entertainment
to change, rearrange, add or delete programming. Your factory-installed
programming including canceling, moving SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
or adding particular channels, and its prices, hardware and a limited subscription term,
at any time, with or without notice to you. which begins on the date of sale or lease
Ford Motor Company shall not be of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
responsible for any such programming for availability.
changes.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS
E142593
at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial

Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
299

Audio System
Troubleshooting
Message Condition Action
Acquiring… Radio requires more than No action required. This

two seconds to produce message should disappear
audio for the selected shortly.
channel.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not
or system failure present. clear shortly, or with an igni-
SIRIUS system failure tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer Tune to another channel or
available. choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal The signal is lost from the The signal is blocked. When
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle the signal should return.
antenna.
Updating… Update of channel No action required. The
programming in progress. process may take up to
three minutes.
Questions? Call Your satellite service is no Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
longer available. 539-7474 to resolve
1-888-539-7474 subscription issues.
None found All the channels in the Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
Check Channel Guide skipped or locked. function on that station.
Subscription Updated SIRIUS has updated the No action required.
channels available for your
vehicle.
300

Audio System
USB PORT (If Equipped)
WARNING
while driving and encourage the use of E194341

Make sure you are aware of all applicable A USB Port
local laws that may affect the use of B SD card slot
E201595
The USB port allows you to plug in media

playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See Using
SYNC™ With Your Media Player (page
323).
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)

The media hub is located in the center
console or in front of the gear shift.
301

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
E198355
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications • Use the advanced voice recognition

system that works with your system.
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and • Charge your USB device (if your device
portable media player. This allows you to: supports this).
• Make and receive calls. *
These features are not available in all
• Access and play music from your markets and may require activation.
portable music player. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
• Use 911 Assist and applications, such market.
as Spotify and Glympse, via SYNC Make sure that you review your device's
*
AppLink. manual before using it with SYNC.
• Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands. Support
• Stream music from your connected The SYNC support team is available to
phone. help you with any questions you cannot
• Text message. answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
302

Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST. When using SYNC:

In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673. • Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673. or damaged. Place cords and cables
Times are subject to change due to out of the way, so they do not interfere
holidays. with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
SYNC Owner Account • Do not leave playing devices in your
Why do I need a SYNC owner account? vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
• Essential for keeping up with the latest device's manual for further information.
software downloads available for
SYNC. • Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have. Privacy Information
Driving Restrictions When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
For your safety, certain features are your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
speed-dependent and restricted when your phone. This profile is created in order to
vehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km). offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
Safety Information
things, this profile may contain data about
WARNING your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
Driving while distracted can result in including history of calls when your cellular
loss of vehicle control, crash and phone was not connected to the system.
injury. We strongly recommend that In addition, if you connect a media device,
you use extreme caution when using any the system creates and retains an index of
device that may take your focus off the supported media content. The system also
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe records a short development log of
operation of your vehicle. We recommend approximately 10 minutes of all recent
against the use of any hand-held device system activity. The log profile and other
while driving and encourage the use of system data may be used to improve the
voice-operated systems when possible. system and help diagnose any problems
Make sure you are aware of all applicable that may occur.
electronic devices while driving. The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
303

System data cannot be accessed without USING VOICE RECOGNITION

special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor This system helps you control many
Company and Ford of Canada will not features using voice commands. This
access the system data for any purpose allows you to keep your hands on the
other than as described absent consent, a wheel and focus on what is around you.
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government Initiating a Voice Session
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may Press the voice button. A list of
seek to access the information available voice commands
independently of Ford Motor Company and E142599 appears in the display.
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist. Global Voice Commands
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 318). These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
(cancel | exit) This command ends the voice session. You

can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.
help This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.
(main menu | start again) This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses

Helpful Hints
between words.
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is • You can interrupt the system at any
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from time while it is speaking by pressing the
open windows and road vibrations may voice button. You can cancel a voice
prevent the system from correctly session by pressing and holding the
recognizing spoken commands. voice button.
• Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
304

System Interaction and Feedback The default setting is to a higher level of

interaction in order to help you learn to use
The system provides feedback through the system. You can change these settings
audible tones, prompts, questions and at any time.
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of Adjusting the Interaction Level
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less Press the voice button. When
instruction and feedback. prompted, say:
E142599
Voice Command Action and Description
voice settings
Then either of the following:
interaction mode novice Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
interaction mode advanced Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
voice settings
Then either of the following:
confirmation prompts off Make a best guess from the command; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
confirmation prompts on Clarify your voice command with a short
question.
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
305

To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
voice settings
Then any of the following:
phone confirmation on When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
phone confirmation off The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
• Call waiting notification.

Changing the Voice Settings
• Caller ID.
In addition to using voice commands to
change the voice settings, you can also use Other features, such as text messaging
the menu in the audio display. using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To change the voice settings press the To check your phone's compatibility, see
Menu button then select: your phone's manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
Menu Item www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
SYNC-Settings
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Voice settings
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR calls.
PHONE Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 4000 entries per
Hands-free calling is one of the main Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
dependent on your cellular phone's and the radio. Shift the transmission into
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular park (P) for automatic transmission or first
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology gear for manual transmission.
support the following functions:
Using the Audio System
• Answering an incoming call.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
• Ending a call.
the up and down arrows on your audio
• Using privacy mode. system.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
306

1. Make sure to switch on your phone's

Bluetooth feature before starting the Press the voice and when prompted
search. See your device's manual if say:
necessary.
Voice Command Action and Descrip-
2. Press the PHONE button. When the tion
audio display indicates there is no
paired phone, select the option to add. (pair ([Bluetooth] Follow the instruc-
3. When a message to begin pairing device | phone | tions on the audio
appears in the audio display, search for Bluetooth audio) | display.
SYNC on your phone to start the pairing add phone)
process. You can say any of the voice commands
4. When prompted on your cell phone’s that appear within open and close brackets
display, confirm that the PIN provided that are separated by |. For example,
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed where; (what's | what is) appears you say;
on your cell phone. Your phone is now what's or what is.
paired and the display indicates that
The commands that have [ ] around the
the pairing was successful. If you are
word means that the word is optional.
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen. Depending on your phone's capability and
The display indicates when the pairing your market, the system may prompt you
is successful. with questions, such as setting the current
Depending on your phone's capability and phone as the primary phone (the phone
your market, the system may prompt you SYNC automatically tries to connect with
with questions, such as setting the current first upon vehicle start-up) and
phone as the primary phone (the phone downloading your phonebook.
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and Pairing Subsequent Phones
downloading your phonebook.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
Using Voice Commands and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
Make sure to switch on your gear for manual transmission.
phone's Bluetooth feature
E142599 before starting the search. See Note: To scroll through the menus, press
your device's manual if necessary. the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button.
3. Select the option for Bluetooth
Devices.
4. Press the OK button.
307

5. Select the option to add. This starts Voice Command

the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing (hold call [on] | place call on hold) 2
appears in the audio display, search for

SYNC on your device. join (calls | call) 2
7. When prompted on your cell phone’s

mute call [on] 2
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now (mute call off | un-mute call) 2
paired and the display indicates that

the pairing was successful. If you are (turn ringer on | silent mode off)
prompted to enter a PIN on your device, (turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing [text] (messages | message) 3
is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell help
phone options. Your cell phone may also
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
prompt you to give SYNC permission to
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
access information. For more information
example you could say "Call Home".
on your cell phone’s capability, see your
1
cell phone’s manual and visit the website. See Dial table below.
2
Phone Voice Commands These commands are only valid while in
a phone call.
Press the voice button. When 3
prompted, say any of the See the text message table below.
E142599 following:
Dial Commands
Voice Command
Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following commands:
(phone | Blackberry | iPhone)
Voice Commands
Then say any of the following:
411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)
call (___)
700 (seven hundred)
call ___ at home
800 (eight hundred)
call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work)
900 (nine hundred)
call ___ on (cell | mobile)
Clear (deletes all entered digits)
call ___ on other
Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)
dial [[a] number] 1
Number <0-9>
([go to] privacy | transfer to phone 2
| privacy on)
308

Voice Commands
Voice Command
Plus
(connect | You can state the name of
Pound (#) device) ___ the desired device, such as
“My iPhone”,“My Galaxy”
Star (*)
or“My iPod”. SYNC may
ask you to confirm the type
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the of device (Phone, USB, or
phone button or press any button on the Bluetooth Audio).
audio system.
To access text messages say: Making Calls
Voice Command
E142599
[text] (messages | message)
Then say any of the following: Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
(listen to | read) ([text] message)
Voice Command
forward (text | [text] message)
call [[a]
reply to (text | [text] message) name]
call [sender] dial [[a] SYNC prompts you to say
number] the numbers that you wish
Phonebook Hints to dial. After you say the
numbers, the system
To hear how the SYNC system speaks a confirms it. You can then
name browse phonebook, select a contact say:
and press:
When the system has stated the
Menu Item number, you say any of the following:
Hear it Voice Command
Changing Devices Using Voice (dial | send) This initiates the call.
Commands
(delete | This erases the spoken
Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple correct) digits.
phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch
devices say: To end the call, press the end call button
on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display.
309

Receiving Calls
To use the screen to reject a call select:
Accepting calls
Menu Item
When receiving a call, you can answer the
call by pressing the accept call button on Reject
the steering wheel or use the screen.
Ignore the call by doing nothing.
To use the screen to accept a call
select: Phone Options during an Active
Call
Menu Item
During an active call, you have more menu
Accept features that become available, such as
putting a call on hold or joining calls.
Rejecting Calls
To access this menu, choose one of the
When receiving a call, you can reject the options available at the bottom of the
call by pressing the reject call button on audio display or select More to choose
the steering wheel or use the screen. from the following options:
Menu Item Description and action
Mic. off Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the

microphone on, select the option again.
Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When
selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.
Hold Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
indicates the call is on hold.
Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad
(for example, numbers for passwords).
Join calls Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum
of three callers on a multiparty or conference call.
1. Select the More option.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the More option.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
310

4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact

appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Call History Access your call history log.
2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the

Accessing Features through the phone menu.
Phone Menu 2. Select one of the options available.
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
Display Description and action
Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.
Phonebook Access your downloaded phonebook.
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to access an
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters
on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
Call History Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press
the OK button to make your selection.
Speed Dial Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the
numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.
311

Text messaging Send, download and delete text messages.

BT Devices Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).
Phone settings View various settings and features on your phone.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature

Text Messaging and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3.1 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
When a new message arrives, an audible
SYNC allows you to receive, send, tone sounds and the audio display
download and delete text messages. The indicates you have a new message.
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have To hear the message you can say:
to take your eyes off the road.
Voice command Description and
Receiving a Text Message action
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. (listen to | read) Select this option
Your phone must support downloading text ([text] message) to have the system
messages using Bluetooth to receive read the message
incoming text messages. to you.
Using the screen you also have the following options:

Menu Description and action
Item
Ignore Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.
View Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
More... If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
312


Item
Reply to Press the OK button to access, and then scroll

sender through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Call sender Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.
Forward Press the OK button to forward the message to
msg. anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
2. Select the text messaging option, and

Sending, Downloading and Deleting then press the OK button.
Your Text Messages
Choose from the following options:

Item
New Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15
messages.
View Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to
have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select
the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or
forward the message.
Delete Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular
phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your
text messages.
More... Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all
unread messages from your cellular phone.
3. Press the OK button again to confirm

Sending a Text Message when the system asks if you want to
Note: You can only send a text message to send the message. A pre-defined
one recipient at a time. signature appears on each text
message.
1. Select the send option when the
desired selection highlights in the audio Note: You can send text messages either
display. by choosing a contact from the phonebook
and selecting the text option from the audio
2. Select the confirmation option when display or by replying to a received message
the contact appears. in the inbox.
313

Accessing Your Phone Settings phonebook, and set up automatic

download.
These are phone-dependent features. Your
phone settings allow you to access and 1. Press the PHONE button.
adjust features such as your ring tone and 2. Scroll until the phone settings option
text message notification, modify your appears, and then press the OK button.
Scroll to select from the following options:

Set as master If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone
as the master when there is more than one cellular phone
paired to the system. This option can be changed for all
cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the
Bluetooth Devices menu.
Phone status See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular
phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left
arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.
Set ringtone Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your
phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone
sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone
option.
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.
Text msg notify Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to
switch the audible tone off or on.
Phonebook pref. Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,
delete or download). Press the OK button to select and
scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences
table below.
314

Menu Item Phonebook preferences
Add contacts Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Delete When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the
current phonebook and call history. The system takes you
back to the menu for phone settings.
Download now Press the OK button to select and download your phone-
book to the system.
Auto-download When automatic download is on, the system deletes any
changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since
your last download.
When automatic download is off, the system does not
download your phonebook when your cellular phone
connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text
messages when your paired cellular phone connects to
the system. Check or uncheck this option to download
your phonebook automatically each time your phone
connects to the system. Download times are phone-
dependent and quantity-dependent.
Sorting Pref. Enabling this feature allows you to select how your
contacts are displayed. You can select:
First/Last name Last/First name

Bluetooth Devices 2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you and then press the OK button.
to add, connect and delete devices as well
as set a phone as primary.
Select from the following options:

Add Pair additional phones to the system.

1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
315

2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio

display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's
manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm
that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted
to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the
screen. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,
select either yes or no.
5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options.
Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC
permission to access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s
manual and visit the website.
Delete Select the delete option and confirm when the system
asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone
from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair
it again.
Master The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular
phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you
select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the
list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone
as master by selecting the master option and confirming
it as the primary.
Conn. Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have
one phone connected at a time to use the phone's func-
tionality. When you connect another phone, the previous
phone disconnects from the telephone services. The
system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for
the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio
music playback feature at the same time.
Discon. Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option
and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,
you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing
process.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and

System Settings then press the OK button.
1. Press the MENU button.
316

Scroll to select from the following options:

Bluetooth on Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's

Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then
press the OK button to change the option's status.
Set defaults Return to the factory default settings without erasing your
indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices). Select this option and
confirm when prompted in the audio display.
Master reset Completely erase all information stored in the system
(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to factory default settings.
Install on SYNC Install downloaded applications or software updates.
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation
successfully.
System info Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number. Press the OK button to select.
Voice settings The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 304).
Browse USB Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up and down
arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use
the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.
You can select media content for playback from this menu.
317

SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
SERVICES (If Equipped)
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
In order for the following features to work, operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
your cellular phone must be compatible in which 911 is the emergency number.
with SYNC. To check your phone's Note: Before setting this feature on, make
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or Notice later in this section for important
www.syncmaroute.ca. information.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
an emergency. or off, that setting applies for all paired
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
to and use certain applications such as a voice message plays or a display message
Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
compatible). started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by Note: Every phone operates differently.
market. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
911 Assist using this feature.
WARNINGS If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
before a crash, the system will not pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
dial for help which could delay vehicle may be able to contact emergency
response time, potentially increasing the services by dialing 911 through a paired and
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an can learn more about the 911 Assist
emergency call if you can do it feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
yourself. Dial emergency services www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
immediately to avoid delayed response www.syncmaroute.ca.
time which could increase the risk of See Supplementary Restraints System
serious injury or death after a crash. If you (page 35). Important information about
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds airbag deployment is in this chapter.
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional. See Roadside Emergencies (page 190).
Important information about the fuel pump
Always place your phone in a secure shut-off is in this chapter.
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
318

Setting 911 Assist On or Off • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone

must have adequate network coverage,
Press the phone button to enter the battery power and signal strength.
phone menu and scroll to: • The vehicle must have battery power
Menu Action and Description and be located in the U.S., Canada or
Item in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
911 Assist Press the OK button to
confirm and enter the 911 In the Event of a Crash
assist menu. Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
On Press the OK button when the the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
desired option appears in the Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
Off radio display. damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
to connect to a previously paired cell
If you choose not to activate this phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
feature you will have the following emergency services.
options:
Before making the call:
Menu Action and Description
• SYNC provides a short window of time
Item
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
Voice Provides a display and voice If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
Reminder reminder at phone connection attempts to dial 911.
ON at vehicle start. • SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
Voice Provides a display reminder 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
Reminder only without a voice reminder your screen or press and hold the
OFF at phone connection. phone button on your steering wheel".
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
To make sure that 911 Assist works
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
properly:
message plays for the 911 operator, and
• SYNC must be powered and working then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
properly at the time of the incident and to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
throughout feature activation and use. provide your name, phone number and
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on location immediately, because not all 911
before the incident. systems are capable of receiving this
• You must pair and connect a information electronically.
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible 911 Assist May Not Work If
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone • Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
must have the ability to make and hardware sustains damage in a crash.
maintain an outgoing call at the time • The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
of the incident. system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
319

911 Assist Privacy Notice Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may Some apps work automatically with no
disclose to emergency services that your setup. Other apps want you to configure
vehicle has been in a crash involving the your personal settings and personalize your
deployment of an airbag or activation of experience by creating stations or favorites.
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or We recommend you do this at home or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable outside of your vehicle.
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other Note: AppLink is not available if your
details about your vehicle or crash to assist vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch
911 operators to provide the most system.
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do To Access Using the SYNC Menu
not switch the feature on.
Press the MENU button to access the
SYNC Mobile Apps menu on-screen. Then select:
The system enables voice and steering Menu Action and Description
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled Item
smartphone apps. When an app is running SYNC-Apps
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice Mobile Scroll through the list of
commands and steering wheel controls. Apps available applications and
Note: You must pair and connect your select a particular app or
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. select:
Note: iPhone users need to connect the Find New Apps
phone to the USB port.
Note: Android users need to connect the Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth. AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and Accessing an App's Menu
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website. When an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button on the steering
Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps wheel control to access the app menu.
will vary by region.
You can access various app features from
here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
down.
Press the left arrow button on the steering
wheel control to exit the app menu.
320

To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button then when prompted say:

Menu Item Action and Description
mobile (apps | Say the name of the application after the tone.
applications) The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
help Use this command to discover the available voice commands.
SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always available:

mobile (apps | applications) SYNC prompts you to say the name of an

app to start it on SYNC.
list [mobile] (apps | applications) SYNC lists all of the currently available
mobile apps.
find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications) Searches your connected mobile device for
SYNC-compatible mobile apps.
help
You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the

App Permissions system may ask you to grant certain
App permissions are organized by groups. permissions, for example:
You can grant these group permissions • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
individually. You can change a permission information to the app such as, but not
group status any time when not driving, by limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
using the settings menu. consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
321

• To allow your vehicle to provide location based apps.

location information, including: GPS Note: You only need to grant permissions
and speed. the first time you use an app with SYNC.
• To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
and voice capabilities while running in any damages or loss of privacy relating to
a background state. Push notifications usage of an app, or dissemination of any
may be particularly useful for news or vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select:
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
All Apps You can also select a specific app.
If the app supports push notifications, this
setting is listed. Select to enable or disable
the feature as required.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for

Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps each connected device the first time you
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC select a mobile app using the system.
requires user consent to send and receive Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
app authorization information and updates not responsible for any additional charges
using the data plan associated with the you may receive from your service provider,
connected device. when your vehicle sends or receives data
Data is sent to Ford in the United States through the connected device. This includes
through the connected device. The any additional charges incurred due to
information is encrypted and includes your driving in areas when roaming out of a home
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous network.
usage statistics and debugging App Status
information. Updates may take place
automatically. You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu.
322

There are three possible statuses:

Update Needed The system has detected a new app

requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.
Up-To-Date No update is required.
Updating... The system is trying to receive an update.
Update settings
Request Update Select this option from the settings menu

to manually preform a needed update.
Disable Updates Select this option from the settings menu
to disable automatic updates.
Doing so also disables the use of Mobile
Apps on SYNC.
Confirm that the USB device has been

formatted correctly and has the following
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR specifications:
MEDIA PLAYER • USB 2.0.
You can access and play music from your • File format must be FAT16/32.
digital music player over your vehicle's The format of the audio files on the USB
speaker system using the system's media device must be:
menu or voice commands. You can also • MP3.
sort and play your music by specific
categories, such as artist and album. • Non DRM protected WMA.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up • WAV.
to 15,000 songs. • AAC.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any Connecting Your Digital Media
digital media player including: iPod, Zune, Player to the USB Port
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. SYNC also supports audio formats, Note: If your digital media player has a
such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC. power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
323

To Connect Using Voice Commands To Connect Using the System Menu

Plug the device into one of the vehicle's 1. Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports. USB ports.
2. Press the MEDIA button and select
Press the voice button and when either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media
prompted, say: source list in the audio display.
Voice Command Action and Descrip-
tion
(USB [stick] | iPod You can now play

| MP3 [player]) music by saying any
of the appropriate
voice commands.
See the media
voice commands.
Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do

not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example,
for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3
[player]) appears, you can say USB or USB
stick.
To view USB content select:

Message Description and Action
Browse USB Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback
audio automatically.
Message
You can browse the files on the USB
device in categories. Select BROWSE Albums
from the buttons at the bottom of the
audio display and choose from the Genres
following:
Browse USB
Message
Reset USB
Play all
Media Voice Commands
Playlists
Press the voice button and when
Songs
prompted say:
E142599
Artists
324

Voice Command Description and Action
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player]) voice commands.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or
"what is playing".
Command Description and Action
pause Pauses device playback.

play Resumes device playback.
play [album] ___
play all Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.
play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | Plays the next track on the current media.
chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | Plays the previous track on current media.
podcast | chapter | episode]
[play] (similar music | more like this) Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the
one currently playing.
play [song | track | title | file] ___
repeat off
repeat (one | track) [on] Repeats the current track.
325

Command Description and Action
shuffle [all] [on] Plays the current playlist in a random order.

(Not all devices support this command.)
shuffle off
((who's | who is) this | who plays this | At any time during playback, you can press
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what the voice button and ask the system what is
| which) (song | track | artist) is this | playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what (if populated) of the current track.
is) this)
If we wanted to play the entire album, we

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a can say:
group, artist or song. For example you • Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
could say "Play artist The Beatles". • Play "Magical Mystery Tour".
Examples of USB Commands Bluetooth Audio
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive The system is also capable of playing
ways to find and play a song using voice. music from your cellular phone through
For example, if we have a song called Bluetooth.
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to To switch the Bluetooth audio on, use the
play this song: MEDIA button (next to the audio display)
or Source button, or press the voice button
• Play song "Penny Lane". and when prompted say:
• Play "Penny Lane".
Voice Command
Bluetooth audio
Voice Command
pause
play
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
326

Media Menu Features reset the index of your USB devices.

The media menu allows you to select how Press the MEDIA button and select either
to play your music (such as by artist, genre, USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list
shuffle or repeat), find similar music or in the audio display to start USB playback.
Options This will enter the media menu.
Shuffle Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Similar music You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-
tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice
recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the

Accessing Your USB Song Library audio display) to select USB playback.
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Browse USB This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist or track.
327

If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media.
If there are media files, you have the following options:

Display Description and Action
Play all Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
*
in numerical order.
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Playlists Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
*
or MTP).
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.
Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
*
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Albums Sort all indexed media files by album.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.
Genres Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.
Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
328

Display Description and Action
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and

then press the OK button.
Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.
USB 2 (If Equipped)

Using Voice Commands
Your vehicle may come equipped with an
You can access and view your USB songs additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
using voice commands. at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
port. inside the storage compartment of the
vehicle's center console.
Press the voice button and when
You can plug in an additional USB device
prompted, say any of the following
into the second USB port.
commands:
You can access both USB devices by using
Accessing and Viewing USB Media voice commands.
(browse | search | show) all (album | To access a USB device press the voice
albums) button and when prompted say:
(browse | search | show) all (artist | Voice command
artists)
USB 1
(browse | search | show) all (genre |
genres) USB 2
(browse | search | show) all (playlist |
playlists) Note: SYNC only supports one connected
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs one you plug in first). When you connect a
| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks) second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it.
(browse | search | show) album ___
Bluetooth Devices and System
(browse | search | show) artist ___
Settings
(browse | search | show) genre ___
You can access these menus using the
(browse | search | show) playlist ___ audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 306).
329

Voice Commands for Audio Voice Command

Sources
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
Your voice system allows you to change (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
audio sources with a simple voice | which) (song | track | artist) is this |
command. (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
E142599 help
*
Press the voice button and when If equipped.
prompted say:
Radio Voice Commands
Voice Command
If you are listening to the radio,
(music | audio | entertainment) [system] press the voice button, and then
E142599 say any of the commands in the
Below are a few examples of voice following table.
commands you can use.
[tune [to]] AM If you are not listening to the radio,
press the voice button and, after the
[tune [to]] AM1 tone, say:
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | Voice Command
autoset)
Radio
[tune [to]] AM 2
You can then say any of the following
Bluetooth (audio | stereo) commands.
(disc | CD [player]) play [tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] FM [tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] FM1 [tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) [tune [to]] AM 2
[tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
Radio [tune [to]] AM preset ___
tune [to] SAT *
[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___
Sirius * [tune [to]] FM

[tune [to]] FM1
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) preset ___
330

Voice Command Voice Commands
[tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___

[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM]) [tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___
[tune [to]] FM preset ___ tune [to] [Sirius]
FM ___ HD ___ * Help
[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___ [tune [to]] Sirius You can say the
[channel] ___ channel number (0-
HD ___ * 233) to listen to that
Sirius station.
[tune [to]] preset ___
CD Voice Commands
Tune
If you are listening to a CD, press
help the voice button, and then say
*
E142599 any of the commands in the
If equipped.
following table.
Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
(If equipped) If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
To listen to Sirius satellite radio, say:
press the voice button and, after
E142599 the tone, say: Voice Command
(disc | CD [player]) play

Voice Commands
You can then say any of the following
Sirius commands.
pause
When you are listening to Sirius
satellite radio, you can press the voice play
button, and say any of the commands
in the following table. [play] next track
Voice Commands [play] previous track
tune [to] SAT [play | change to] track [number] ___
[tune [to]] SAT 1 repeat (track | song) [on]
[tune [to]] SAT 2 repeat folder [on]
[tune [to]] SAT 3 repeat off
[tune [to]] preset ___ (shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks |

songs) [on]]
[tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___
331

Voice Command Use the website at any time to check your

phone's compatibility, register your
(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] | account and set preferences as well as
disc) [on] access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on] www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
shuffle off
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Phone issues
Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s)
The audio control settings Review your phone's manual

There is excessive back-
on your phone may be about audio adjustments.
ground noise during a phone
affecting SYNC perform-
call.
ance.
Try turning off the device,
During a call, I can hear the
This may be a possible resetting the device,
other person but they
phone malfunction. removing the device's
cannot hear me.
battery, then trying again.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent Try turning off the device,
feature. resetting the device or
removing the device's
SYNC is not able to down- battery, then trying again.
load my phonebook. Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
This may be a possible the Add Contacts feature.
phone malfunction. Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
The system says Phonebook Try pushing your phonebook
Downloaded but the This may be a limitation on contacts to SYNC by using
phonebook in SYNC is your phone's capability. the Add Contacts feature.
empty or missing contacts.
332

Phone issues
If the missing contacts are

stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
resetting the device or
This is a phone-dependent removing the device's
feature. battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
I am having trouble from SYNC, deleting SYNC
connecting my phone to from your device and trying
SYNC. again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
This may be a possible Bluetooth connection on
phone malfunction. your phone.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
333

Phone issues
Turn off the Auto phone-

book download setting.
This is a phone-dependent Go to the website to review
feature. your phone's compatibility.
Text messaging is not Try turning off the device,
working on SYNC. This may be a possible resetting the device or
phone malfunction. removing the device's
USB and media issues

resetting the device,
removing the device's
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
I am having trouble This may be a possible
connecting my device. device malfunction. Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
SYNC does not recognize
leaving the device in your
my device when I turn on the This is a device limitation.
vehicle during very hot or
car.
cold temperatures.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
Bluetooth audio does not This is a phone-dependent website to confirm your
stream. feature. phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
334

USB and media issues
Make sure you correctly

connect the device to SYNC,
The device is not connected.
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre Make sure that all song
information. details are populated.
SYNC does not recognize
The file may be corrupted.
music that is on my device.
Some devices require you to
The song may have copy-
change the USB settings
right protection, which does
from mass storage to MTP
not allow it to play.
class.
Voice command issues
Review the phone voice

commands and the media
You may be using the wrong
voice commands at the
voice commands.
beginning of their respective
sections.
SYNC does not understand After pressing the voice icon,
what I am saying. wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
You may be speaking too
appears before saying a
soon or at the wrong time.
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Review the media voice
SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong
commands at the beginning
the name of a song or artist. voice commands.
of the media section.
335

Say the song or artist

exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
You may be saying the by Prince and the Revolution
name differently than the or Prince and the New
way you saved it. Power Generation.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
The system may not be them. LOLA requires you to
reading the name the same say "L-O-L-A".
way you are saying it. Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong Make sure you are saying the
voice commands. contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
SYNC does not understand Wilson, say "Call Joe
or is calling the wrong Wilson".
contact when I want to
make a call. Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
You may be saying the SYNC is having trouble
name differently than the understanding. SYNC will
way you saved it. read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
336

The system works better if

The system may not be
you list full names, such as
reading the name the same
"Joe Wilson" rather than
way you are saying it.
"Joe".
Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special charac-
may be very short and ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
similar, or they may contain the system does not recog-
special characters. nize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
Your phonebook contacts have to spell it. JAKE
may be in CAPS. requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
AppLink issues
Ensure you have a compat-

ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
AppLink Mobile Applica-
ally, ensure your phone is
tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone
paired and connected to
New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC.
SYNC in order to find
find any applications.
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
AppLink-enabled apps are latest version of the app
My phone is connected, but
not installed and running on from your phone's app store.
I still cannot find any apps.
your mobile device. Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
require you to register or
337

AppLink issues
login on the app on the

phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
Sometime apps do not menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open finding the particular app
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC, and choosing 'Force stop.'
cannot find any apps. over ignition cycles, for Don't forget to restart the
example. app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is There is a Bluetooth bug on Reset the Bluetooth on your
connected, my app(s) are some order versions of the phone by turning it off and
running, I restarted them, Android operating system then turning Bluetooth back
but I still cannot find any that may cause apps that on. If you are in your vehicle,
apps. were found on your previous SYNC should be able to
vehicle drive to not be found automatically re-connect to
again if you have not turned your phone if you press the
off Bluetooth. "Phone" button.
338

AppLink issues
Unplug the USB cable from

the phone, wait a moment,
My iPhone phone is and plug the USB cable
connected, my app is back in to the phone. After a
The USB connection to
running, I restarted the app few seconds, the app should
SYNC may need to be reset.
but I still cannot find it on appear in SYNC's Mobile
SYNC. Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
I have an Android phone. I
volume of the device by
found and started my media
The bluetooth volume on using the device's volume
app on SYNC, but there is no
the phone may be low. control buttons which are
sound or the sound is very
most often found on the
low.
side of the device.
Some Android devices have Force close or uninstall the
a limited number of apps you do not want SYNC
bluetooth ports apps can to find. If the app has a "Ford
I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have SYNC" setting, disable that
AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your setting in the app's settings
phone listed in SYNC's phone than the number of menu on the phone.
Mobile Apps Menu. available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
339

Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories Lifestyle

that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the • Ash cup or smoker's packages.
online store web site: • Camping tent*.
• Car cover*.
Web Address (United States)
• Cargo area protector.
www.Accessories.Ford.com • Cargo net*.
• Cargo shade.
Web Address (Canada) • Rear seat entertainment*.
www.Accessories.Ford.ca • Soft cargo organizers.
• Roof racks and carriers*.
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace • Recovery hook (towing eye).
any properly authorized dealer-installed • Trailer towing accessories.
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or Peace of Mind
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the • Keyless entry keypad.
defective accessories. • Remote start.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your • Vehicle security systems.
Ford accessory through the warranty that • Wheel locks.
provides the greatest benefit:
• Bumper mounted warning sensors*.
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory
• The remainder of your new vehicle
manufacturer designs, develops and
limited warranty.
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Contact an authorized dealer for details Accessories, and does not design or test
and a copy of the warranty. these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
Exterior Style authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer’s limited warranty details,
• Custom graphics*.
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
• Hood deflector*. Accessories product limited warranty from
• Side window deflectors. the accessory manufacturer.
• Splash guards.
• Spoiler winglets.
Interior Style
• Door sill plates.
• Floor mats.
• Interior light kit.
• Seat covers*.
340

Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep

the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example, two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
341

Extended Service Plan (ESP)
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING That means you get:

COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN. Lincoln dealership
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S. • Repairs performed by factory trained
Only) technicians, using genuine parts
More than 32 million Ford owners have Rental Car Reimbursement

discovered the powerful protection of Ford
Extended Service Plan. It is the extended 1st day Rental Benefit
service plan backed by Ford Motor You take advantage of replacement
Company, and provides peace of mind transportation if your vehicle is at your
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited authorized dealer for same day covered
Warranty coverage. repairs.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself Extended Rental Benefits
One service bill – the cost of parts and If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
labor – can easily exceed the price of your repairs, you are eligible for rental car
Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP coverage, including bumper to bumper
you minimize your risk for unexpected warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
repair bills and rising repair costs.
Roadside Assistance
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
There are four core Extended Service Plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your • Towing, flat-tire change and battery
authorized dealer for details. jump starts
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over • Travel expense reimbursement for
1,000 covered components, this plan lodging, meals and rental car.
is so complete that we generally only • Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
discuss what’s not covered. rental car coverage and emergency
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, transportation.
and includes many high-tech items.
Transferable Coverage
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
components.
you can transfer any remaining coverage
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by to the new owner. Whenever you sell your
all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S., vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
Canada and Mexico. It is the extended higher degree of confidence that vehicle
service plan authorized and backed by Ford was properly maintained with Ford ESP,
Motor Company. thereby improving resale value.
342

Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN

Maintaining Your Vehicle! (CANADA ONLY)
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a You can get more protection for your
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
scheduled maintenance, and selected Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so is the only service contract backed by Ford
you never have to worry about affording Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
your vehicle’s maintenance. It covers Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
regular checkups, routine inspections, Extended Service Plan provides benefits
preventive care and replacement of select such as:
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear: • Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
• Windshield wiper blades. wear items.
• Spark plugs. • Protection against repair costs after
• The clutch disc. your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Brake pads and linings. Coverage expires.
• Shock absorbers. • Roadside Assistance benefits.
• Struts. There are several Ford Extended Service
• Engine Belts. Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
o-rings. including reimbursement for towing and
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment. rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
Interest Free Finance Options peace-of-mind protection throughout
Available Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
Take advantage of our interest free
authorized Ford Motor Company dealers.
installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an Note: Repairs performed outside of
affordable, no interest, no fee payment Canada, the United States and Mexico are
program allowing you all the security and not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan
benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying coverage.
over time. You are pre-approved with no This information is subject to change. For
credit checks, no hassles! To learn more, more information, visit your local Ford of
call our Ford ESP specialists at Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
800-367-3377. Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
Ford ESP you.
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
343

GENERAL MAINTENANCE Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®

Replacement Parts
INFORMATION
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
Carefully following the maintenance exceed our specifications. Parts installed
schedule helps protect against major repair at your dealership carry a nationwide
expenses resulting from neglect or 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
inadequate maintenance and may help to parts and labor limited warranty.
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
completed maintenance with your vehicle. may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
We have established regular maintenance emissions compliance.
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you Convenience
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes; Many dealerships have extended evening
one is to maintain the reliability of your and Saturday hours to make your service
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost visit more convenient and they offer one
of owning your vehicle down. stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
It is your responsibility to have all from general maintenance to collision
scheduled maintenance performed and to repairs.
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
manual. See Capacities and or body shops. Please contact your dealer
Specifications (page 268). for details.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance Protecting Your Investment
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance. Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your reliability, durability and resale value. To
Dealership? maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
Factory-Trained Technicians make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
Service technicians participate in extensive
intervals.
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the Your vehicle is equipped with the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
dealership about the training and displays a message in the information
certification their technicians have display at the proper oil change interval.
received. This interval may be up to one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers).
344

When the oil change message appears in Additives and Chemicals

the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil This owner's manual and the Ford
change within two weeks or 500 miles Workshop Manual list the recommended
(800 kilometers) of the message additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
appearing. Make sure you reset the We do not recommend using chemicals or
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil additives not approved by us as part of
change. See (page 87). your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you Oils, Fluids and Flushing
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5000 miles (8000 In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
kilometers) from your last oil change. normal operating characteristic and, by
Never exceed one year or 10000 miles itself, does not necessarily indicate a
(16000 kilometers) between oil change concern or that the fluid needs to be
intervals. changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
with multiple, complex, performance that also show signs of overheating or
systems. Every manufacturer develops foreign material contamination
these systems using different immediately.
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
dealership to properly diagnose and repair fluids at the specified intervals or in
your vehicle. conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
Ford Motor Company has recommended sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance intervals for various parts maintenance. It is critical that systems are
and component systems based upon flushed only with new fluid that is the same
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company as that required to fill and operate the
relies upon this testing to determine the system or using a Ford-approved flushing
most appropriate mileage for replacement chemical.
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and Owner Checks and Services
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance information. maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
345

Check every month
Engine oil level.

Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
346

Multi-Point inspection
Accessory drive belt(s) Hazard warning system operation

Battery performance Horn operation
Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage
*
Fluid levels ; fill if necessary Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
**
pressure
For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service This means you do not have to remember
advisor or technician about the multi-point to change the oil on a mileage-based
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
way to perform a thorough inspection of an oil change is due by displaying a
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you message in the information display.
immediate feedback on the overall The following table provides examples of
condition of your vehicle. vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
NORMAL SCHEDULED and generally decrease with severity of
MAINTENANCE use.
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™

Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
347

When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Interval Vehicle use and example
Normal
7500-10000 miles Normal commuting with highway driving

(12000-16000 km) No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles Moderate to heavy load or towing

(8000-11999 km) Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km) Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
*
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
**
Change engine oil and filter.
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (AWD).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints.
348

*
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 218).
1
Other maintenance items
Every 20000 miles (32000 Replace cabin air filter.

km)
Every 30000 miles (48000 Replace engine air filter.
km)
At 100000 miles (160000 Change engine coolant.
2
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km) 3
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
Change automatic transmission fluid.
4
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km) Replace timing belt (1.6L engine).
Change the PTU and rear axle fluid. See Special Oper-
ating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance (page 350).
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last
engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
349

SPECIAL OPERATING Perform the services shown in the

following tables when specified or within
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the
MAINTENANCE message appearing in your information
display, prompting you to change your oil.
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any • Example 1: The message comes on at
of the following conditions, you need to 28751 miles (46270 kilometers).
perform extra maintenance as indicated. Perform the 30000-mile
If you operate your vehicle occasionally (48000-kilometer) automatic
under any of these conditions, it is not transmission fluid replacement.
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific • Example 2: The message has not
recommendations, see your dealership come on, but the odometer reads
service advisor or technician. 30000 miles (48000 kilometers) (for
example, the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor was reset at 25000 miles
[40000 kilometers]). Perform the
engine air filter replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information

display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service Inspect rear axle and U-joints (AWD).
as required
Every 30000 miles (48000 Change automatic transmission fluid.
km)
Change the PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD). See Axle and
PTU Maintenance under Exceptions.
Every 60000 miles (96000 Replace spark plugs.
km)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information

display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service Replace cabin air filter.
*
as required
Replace engine air filter.
km)
350

Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
Every 60000 miles (96000 Replace spark plugs.
km)
*
This is an optional feature.
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Inspect frequently, service Replace cabin air filter.

*
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Every 5000 miles (8000 Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
km) noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Every 5000 miles (8000 Change engine oil and filter.
**
km) or six months

Perform multi-point inspection.
km)
*
This is an optional feature.
**
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 218).
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
351

Rear Axle and PTU Maintenance: The Hot climate oil change intervals:
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
(AWD only) in your vehicle does not require North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
any normal scheduled maintenance unless locations with similar climates using an
the vehicle has experienced extended American Petroleum Institute (API)
periods of extreme/severe duty cycle Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
driving or the PTU and/or the axle has been mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
submerged in water. Checking the PTU and oil change interval is 5000 miles (8000
rear axle fluid is not necessary unless the kilometers).
unit shows signs of leakage. Contact an
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
authorized dealer for service.
available, then the oil change interval is
California fuel filter replacement: If you 3000 miles (4800 kilometers).
register your vehicle in California, the
Engine air filter and cabin air filter
California Air Resources Board has
replacement: The life of the engine air
determined that the failure to perform this
filter and cabin air filter is dependent on
maintenance item does not nullify the
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
emission warranty or limit recall liability
Vehicles operated in these conditions
before the completion of your vehicle's
require frequent inspection and
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
replacement of the engine air filter and
urges you to have all recommended
cabin air filter.
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:
E146852
352

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
353

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
354

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
355

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
356

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
357

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
358

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
359

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
360

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
361

Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:

Signature:
E146852
362

Appendices
END USER LICENSE Description of Other Rights and

Limitations
AGREEMENT
• Speech Recognition: If the
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER SOFTWARE includes speech
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) an inherently statistical process and
have acquired a vehicle having several that recognition errors are inherent in
devices, including SYNC ® and various the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
control modules, ("DEVICES") that COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
include software licensed or owned by liable for any damages arising out of
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates errors in the speech recognition
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those process. It is your responsibility to
software products of FORD MOTOR monitor any speech recognition
COMPANY origin, as well as associated functions included in the system.
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation • Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
("SOFTWARE") are protected by Decompilation and Disassembly:
international intellectual property laws You may not reverse engineer,
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is decompile, translate, disassemble or
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
• The SOFTWARE may interface with SOFTWARE nor permit others to
and/or communicate with, or may be reverse engineer, decompile or
later upgraded to interface with and/or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
communicate with additional software and only to the extent that such activity
and/or systems provided by FORD is expressly permitted by applicable
MOTOR COMPANY. law notwithstanding this limitation or
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END to the extent as may be permitted by
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") the licensing terms governing use of
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY any open source components included
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE with the SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT • Limitations on Distributing,
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, Copying, Modifying and Creating
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT Derivative Works: You may not
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF distribute, copy, make modifications
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). to or create derivative works based on
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
EULA grants you the following license: extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
• You may use the SOFTWARE as notwithstanding this limitation or to
installed on the DEVICES and as the extent as may be permitted by the
otherwise interfacing with systems licensing terms governing use of any
and/or services provide by or through open source components included with
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third the SOFTWARE.
party software and service providers.
363

Appendices
• Single EULA: The end user • Additional Software/Services: The

documentation for the DEVICES and SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
related systems and services may COMPANY, third party software and
contain multiple EULAs, such as service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
multiple translations and/or multiple its designated agent to provide or make
media versions (e.g., in the user available to you SOFTWARE updates,
documentation and in the software). supplements, add-on components, or
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you Internet-based services components
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of of the SOFTWARE after the date you
the SOFTWARE. obtain your initial copy of the
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
permanently transfer your rights under Components".) SOFTWARE updates
this EULA only as part of a sale or may cause you to incur additional
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you charges from your wireless service
retain no copies, you transfer all of the provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
SOFTWARE (including all component or third party software and services
parts, the media and printed materials, suppliers provide or make available to
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the you Supplemental Components and
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the no other EULA terms are provided
recipient agrees to the terms of this along with the Supplemental
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, Components, then the terms of this
any transfer must include all prior EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
versions of the SOFTWARE. COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
• Termination: Without prejudice to any discontinue without liability any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY Internet-based services provided to
may terminate this EULA if you fail to you or made available to you through
comply with the terms and conditions the use of the SOFTWARE.
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
364

Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:

SOFTWARE may provide you with the All title and intellectual property rights in
ability to link to third party sites. The and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
third party sites are not under the limited to any images, photographs,
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, animations, video, audio, music, text and
its affiliates and/or its designated "applets" incorporated into the
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its materials, and any copies of the
designated agent are responsible for SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
(i) the contents of any third party sites, COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
any links contained in third party sites, SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
or any changes or updates to third not copy the printed materials
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
other form of transmission received and intellectual property rights in and to
from any third party sites. If the the content which may be accessed
SOFTWARE provides links to third through use of the SOFTWARE is the
party sites, those links are provided to property of the respective content owner
you only as a convenience, and the and may be protected by applicable
inclusion of any link does not imply an copyright or other intellectual property
endorsement of the third party site by laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates rights to use such content outside its
and/or its designated agent. intended use. All rights not specifically
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: granted under this EULA are reserved by
You recognize your obligation to drive FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
responsibly and keep attention on the and third party software and service
road. You will read and abide with the providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
DEVICES operating instructions services which may be accessed through
particularly as they pertain to safety the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
and you agree to assume any risk respective terms of use relating to such
associated with the use of the services. If this SOFTWARE contains
DEVICES. documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: such electronic documentation.
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or subject to U.S. and European Union export
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes applicable international and national laws
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
replacement copy for the existing as well as end-user, end-use and
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
this EULA, including any additional EULA other governments.
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
365

Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant General Operation

you any rights in connection with any • Voice Command Control: Certain
trademarks or service marks of FORD functions within the SYNC® system
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third may be accomplished using voice
party software and service providers. commands. Using voice commands
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to while driving helps you to operate the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions system without removing your hands
provided in the documentation for the from the wheel or eyes from the road.
DEVICES product support, such as the • Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
vehicle owner guide. access any function requiring a
Should you have any questions concerning prolonged view of the screen while you
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, manner before attempting to access a
please refer to the address provided in the function of the system requiring
documentation for the DEVICES. prolonged attention.
No Liability for Certain Damages: • Volume Setting: Do not raise the
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD volume excessively. Keep the volume
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY at a level where you can still hear
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, outside traffic and emergency signals
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO while driving. Driving while unable to
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, hear these sounds could cause an
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL accident.
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN • Navigation Features: Any navigation
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR features included in the system are
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS intended to provide turn by turn
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY instructions to get you to a desired
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL destination. Please make certain all
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES persons using this system carefully
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE read and follow instructions and safety
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW information fully.
VEHICLE. • Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
Information Read and follow perform such set-up or insert data
instructions: while driving can distract your attention
• Before using your SYNC® system, read and could cause an accident or other
and follow all instructions and safety serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
information provided in this end user and legal manner before attempting
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not these operations.
following precautions found in the • Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
Owner Guide can lead to an accident navigation features are provided only
or other serious injuries. as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
366

Appendices
substitute for your personal judgment. Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of

Any route suggestions made by this Risk
system should never replace any local • You agree to each of the following:(a)
traffic regulations or your personal Any use of the SOFTWARE while
judgment or knowledge of safe driving driving an automobile or other vehicle
practices. in violation of applicable law or
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
suggestions if doing so would result in presents a significant risk of distracted
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you driving and should not be attempted
would be placed in an unsafe situation, under any circumstances;(b) Use of
or if you would be directed into an area the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
that you consider unsafe. The driver is poses a significant risk of hearing
ultimately responsible for the safe damage and should not be attempted
operation of the vehicle and therefore, under any circumstances;(c) The
must evaluate whether it is safe to SOFTWARE may not be compatible
follow the suggested directions. with new or different versions of an
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps operating system, third party software,
used by this system may be inaccurate or third party services, and the
because of changes in roads, traffic SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
controls or driving conditions. Always critical failure of an operating system,
use good judgment and common sense third party software, or third party
when following the suggested routes. service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on used with the SOFTWARE (i) may
any navigation features included in the charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
system to route you to emergency may not work correctly, on an
services. Ask local authorities or an uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
emergency services operator for these may change streaming formats or
locations. Not all emergency services discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
such as police, fire stations, hospitals adult, profane or offensive content; and
and clinics are likely to be contained in (v) may contain inaccurate, false or
the map database for such navigation misleading traffic, weather, financial
features. or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
367

Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE

SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY, DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF • The laws of the State of Michigan
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY govern this EULA and Your use of the
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN SOFTWARE. Your use of the
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, SOFTWARE may also be subject to
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND other local, state, national, or
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY international laws. Any litigation arising
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES out of or related to this EULA shall be
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST brought and maintained exclusively in
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT a court of the State of Michigan
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY located in Wayne County or in the
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, United States District Court for the
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES consent to submit to the personal
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c) jurisdiction of a court in the State of
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE Michigan located in Wayne County and
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, the United States District Court for the
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE Eastern District of Michigan for any
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d) dispute arising out of or relating to this
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE, EULA.
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
368

Appendices
Binding Arbitration and Class Action the right to litigate (or participate in as a
Waiver party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
(a) Application. This Section applies to will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT whose decision will be final except for a
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO limited right of appeal under the Federal
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, over the parties may enforce the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF arbitrator’s award.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. (e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
controversy between You and FORD forum will be conducted solely on an
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
exceptions listed above, concerning the MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this dispute heard as a class action, as a private
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, attorney general action, or in any other
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other proceeding in which any party acts or
legal or equitable basis. proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a be combined with another without the
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY prior written consent of all parties to all
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”, affected arbitrations or proceedings.
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the (f) Arbitration procedure. Any
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the arbitration will be conducted by the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and American Arbitration Association (the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to “AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
resolve any dispute through informal Rules. If You are an individual and use the
negotiation within 60 days from the date SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days, if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may less whether or not You are an individual
commence arbitration. or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
(c) Small claims court. You may also Consumer-Related Disputes will also
litigate any dispute in small claims court apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
in your county of residence or FORD Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
business, if the dispute meets all request a telephonic or in-person hearing
requirements to be heard in the small by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
claims court. You may litigate in small involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
claims court whether or not You be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
negotiated informally first. good cause to hold an in-person hearing
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD instead. For more information, see adr.org
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
dispute by informal negotiation or in small commence arbitration only in your county
claims court, any other effort to resolve of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
the dispute will be conducted exclusively principal place of business. The arbitrator
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
369

Appendices
may award the same damages to You (h) Claims or disputes must be filed
individually as a court could. The arbitrator within one year. To the extent permitted
may award declaratory or injunctive relief by law, any claim or dispute under this
only to You individually, and only to the EULA to which this Section applies must
extent required to satisfy Your individual be filed within one year in small claims
claim. Arbitration fees and incentives. court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
• i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
year, it is permanently barred.
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR (i) Severability. If the class action waiver
COMPANY’S last written settlement (Section e) is found to be illegal or
offer made before the arbitrator was unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
appointed (“last written offer”), your dispute, then that portion of Section e will
dispute goes all the way to an not apply to those parts. Instead, those
arbitrator’s decision (called an parts will be severed and proceed in a court
“award”), and the arbitrator awards of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
you more than the last written offer, in arbitration. If any other provision of that
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you portion Section e is found to be illegal or
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of unenforceable, that provision will be
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your severed with the remainder of Section e
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and remaining in full force and effect.
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that Telenav Software End User License
your attorney reasonably accrues for Agreement
investigating, preparing, and pursuing Please read these terms and conditions
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator carefully before you use the TeleNav
will determine the amounts. Software. Your use of the TeleNav
• ii. Disputes involving more than Software indicates that you accept these
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern terms and conditions. If you do not accept
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s these terms and conditions, do not break
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. the seal of the package, launch, or
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
any arbitration you commence, FORD TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA the privacy policy at any time, with or
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or http://www.telenav.com from time to time
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the to review the then current version of this
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous Agreement and of the privacy policy.
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR 1. Safe and Lawful Use
COMPANY commences, it will pay all You acknowledge that devoting attention
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s of injury or death to you and others in
fees or expenses from you in any situations that otherwise require your
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not undivided attention, and you therefore
counted in determining how much a agree to comply with the following when
dispute involves. using the TeleNav Software:
370

Appendices
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise 3. Software License

drive safely;
• Subject to your compliance with the
(b) use your own personal judgment while terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
driving. If you feel that a route suggested hereby grants to you a personal,
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to non-exclusive, non-transferable license
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, (except as expressly permitted below
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs in connection with your permanent
you into an area that you consider to be transfer of the TeleNav Software
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; license), without the right to
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise sublicense, to use the TeleNav
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless Software (in object code form only) in
your vehicle is stationary and parked; order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for upon any termination or expiration of
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, this Agreement. You agree that you will
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, use the TeleNav Software only for your
or in any manner inconsistent with this personal business or leisure purposes,
Agreement; and not to provide commercial
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices navigation services to other parties.
and cables necessary for use of the
3.1 License Limitations
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere • (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
with your driving and will not prevent the disassemble, translate, modify, alter
operation of any safety device (such as an or otherwise change the TeleNav
airbag). Software or any part thereof; (b)
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav attempt to derive the source code,
harmless against all claims resulting from audio library or structure of the
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate TeleNav Software without the prior
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving express written consent of TeleNav;
vehicle, including as a result of your failure (c) remove from the TeleNav
to comply with the directions above. Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
2. Account Information logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
You agree: (a) when registering the distribute, sublicense or otherwise
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with transfer the TeleNav Software to
true, accurate, current, and complete others, except as part of your
information about yourself, and (b) to permanent transfer of the TeleNav
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
to such information, and to keep it true, Software in any manner that
accurate, current and complete.
i. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
371

Appendices
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or is dependent on the accuracy of

regulation, including but not limited to laws navigation, as the maps or functionality
and regulations related to spamming, of the TeleNav Software are not
privacy, consumer and child protection, intended to support such high risk
obscenity or defamation, or applications, especially in more remote
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, geographical areas.
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, • TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
obscene, libelous, or otherwise AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
otherwise permit unauthorized access by SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
third parties to the TeleNav Software EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
without advanced written permission of WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
TeleNav. FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
4. Disclaimers LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
• To the fullest extent permissible
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
or agents or employees of any of the
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
foregoing, be liable for any decision
SOFTWARE.
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information • Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
provided by the TeleNav Software. disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
TeleNav also does not warrant the limitation may not apply to you.
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data 5. Limitation of Liability
may not always reflect reality due to, • TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
among other things, road closures, APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
construction, weather, new roads and CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
other changing conditions. You are OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
responsible for the entire risk arising BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
out of your use of the TeleNav PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
Software. For example but without INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
limitation, you agree not to rely on the SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
TeleNav Software for critical (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
navigation in areas where the LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
well-being or survival of you or others INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
372

Appendices
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, to the exclusive jurisdiction of the

WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES courts of the County of Santa Clara,
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL California. The United Nations
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN Convention on Contracts for the
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING International Sale of Goods shall not
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE apply.
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS 7. Assignment
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT • You may not resell, assign, or transfer
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE this Agreement or any of your rights or
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES obligations, except in totality, in
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT connection with your permanent
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR expressly conditioned upon the new
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS to be bound by the terms and
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. conditions of this Agreement. Any such
6. Arbitration and Governing Law sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
• You agree that any dispute, claim or paragraph will result in immediate
controversy arising out of or relating to termination of this Agreement, without
this Agreement or the TeleNav liability to TeleNav, in which case you
Software shall be settled by and all other parties shall immediately
independent arbitration involving a cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
neutral arbitrator and administered by Notwithstanding the foregoing,
the American Arbitration Association TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
in the County of Santa Clara, California. any other party at any time without
The arbitrator shall apply the notice, provided the assignee remains
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the bound by this Agreement.
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered 8. Miscellaneous
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
8.1
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration This Agreement constitutes the entire
proceeding and the decision of the agreement between TeleNav and you with
arbitrator shall be binding upon both respect to the subject matter hereof.
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement 8.2
and performance hereunder will be
Except for the limited licenses expressly
governed by and construed in
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
accordance with the laws of the State
all right, title and interest in and to the
of California, without giving effect to
TeleNav Software, including without
its conflict of law provisions. To the
limitation all related intellectual property
extent judicial action is necessary in
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
connection with the binding arbitration,
not expressly granted in this Agreement
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
373

Appendices
conferred by implication, statute, 8.6

inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors The headings in this Agreement are for
hereby reserve all of their respective rights convenience of reference only, will not be
other than the licenses explicitly granted deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
in this Agreement. and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
8.3 this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
By using the TeleNav Software, you variations thereof, will not be deemed to
consent to receive from TeleNav all be terms of limitation, but rather will be
communications, including notices, deemed to be followed by the words
agreements, legally required disclosures "without limitation".
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's • The Telenav Software utilizes map and
Website or by downloading such Notices other data licensed to Telenav by third
to your wireless device. If you desire to party vendors for the benefit of you and
withdraw your consent to receive Notices other end users. This Agreement
electronically, you must discontinue your includes end-user terms applicable to
use of the TeleNav Software. these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
8.4 of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
TeleNav's or your failure to require with the following additional terms and
performance of any provision shall not conditions, which are applicable to
affect that party's right to require Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of 9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any North America, LLC
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself. The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
8.5 resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
If any provision herein is held conditions which are agreed to by you, on
unenforceable, then such provision will be the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
modified to reflect the intention of the its licensors (including their licensors and
parties, and the remaining provisions of suppliers) on the other hand.
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect. © 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
374

Appendices
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from positioning devices or any mobile or

the United States Postal Service® to wireless-connected electronic or computer
publish and sell ZIP+4® information. devices, including without limitation
©United States Postal Service® 2014. cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
Prices are not established, controlled or computers, pagers, and personal digital
approved by the United States Postal assistants or PDAs.
Service®. The following trademarks and Warning. The Data may contain
registrations are owned by the USPS: inaccurate or incomplete information due
United States Postal Service, USPS, and to the passage of time, changing
ZIP+4 circumstances, sources used and the
The Data for Mexico includes certain data nature of collecting comprehensive
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y geographic data, any of which may lead to
Geografía. incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
Terms and Conditions “as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
together with the Telenav Software solely licensors and suppliers) make no
for the internal business and personal guarantees, representations or warranties
purposes for which you were licensed, and of any kind, express or implied, arising by
not for service bureau, time-sharing or law or otherwise, including but not limited
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but to, content, quality, accuracy,
subject to the restrictions set forth in the completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
following paragraphs, you agree not to fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, use or results to be obtained from this
decompile, disassemble, create any Data, or that the Data or server will be
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any uninterrupted or error-free.
portion of this Data, and may not transfer Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
except to the extent permitted by LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
mandatory laws. ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
Restrictions. Except where you have been OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
and without limiting the preceding PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
with any products, systems, or applications Territories and Countries do not allow
installed or otherwise connected to or in certain warranty exclusions, so to that
communication with vehicles, capable of extent the above exclusion may not apply
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, to you.
real time route guidance, fleet Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
management or similar applications; or (b) ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
with or in communication with any LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
375

Appendices
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH Governing Law. The above terms and
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR conditions shall be governed by the laws
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, where European HERE Data is used],
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES Convention for Contracts for the
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR International Sale of Goods, which is
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR [insert “The Netherlands” where European
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION HERE Data is used] for any and all
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A disputes, claims and actions arising from
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS or in connection with the Data provided to
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE you hereunder.
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
Government End Users. If the Data is
States, Territories and Countries do not
being acquired by or on behalf of the
allow certain liability exclusions or
United States government or any other
damages limitations, so to that extent the
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
above may not apply to you.
those customarily claimed by the United
Export Control. You shall not export from States government, this Data is a
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct “commercial item” as that term is defined
product thereof except in compliance with, at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
and with all licenses and approvals accordance with these End-User Terms,
required under, applicable export laws, and each copy of Data delivered or
rules and regulations, including but not otherwise furnished shall be marked and
limited to the laws, rules and regulations embedded as appropriate with the
administered by the Office of Foreign following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of treated in accordance with such Notice:
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of NOTICE OF USE
Commerce. To the extent that any such
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
HERE from complying with any of its SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
excused and shall not constitute a breach SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
of this Agreement. West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement This Data is a commercial item as
between Telenav (and its licensors, defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
including their licensors and suppliers) and these End-User Terms under which this
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, Data was provided.
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously © 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
376

Appendices
If the Contracting Officer, federal Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
government agency, or any federal official content and such content providers shall
refuses to use the legend provided herein, be entitled to all of the benefits and
the Contracting Officer, federal protections set forth herein that are
government agency, or any federal official available to Gracenote. You agree that you
must notify HERE prior to seeking will use the content from Gracenote
additional or alternative rights in the Data. ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Gracenote® Copyright Servers for your own personal,
CD and music-related data from non-commercial use only. You agree not
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
Software, copyright © 2000-2007 associated with a music file) to any third
Gracenote. This product and service may party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
practice one or more of the following U.S. EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773; GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459; SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
6,330,593 and other patents issued or EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
pending. Some services supplied under HEREIN.
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523. You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Gracenote and CDDB are registered Data, the Gracenote Software, and
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by violate these restrictions. If your licenses
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of terminate, you agree to cease any and all
Gracenote. use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote® End User License Agreement Gracenote Servers.
(EULA)
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
This device contains software from in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Emeryville, California 94608 Gracenote Content, including all ownership
("Gracenote"). rights. Under no circumstances will either
The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote become liable for any payment
"Gracenote Software") enables this device to you for any information that you provide,
to do disc and music file identification and including any copyrighted material or
obtain music-related information, including music file information. You agree that
name, artist, track, and title information Gracenote may enforce its respective
("Gracenote Data") from online servers rights, collectively or separately, under this
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform agreement against you, directly in each
other functions. You may use Gracenote company's own name.
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
377

Appendices
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY

queries for statistical purposes. The GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
queries without knowing anything about DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
who you are. For more information, see the OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
web page at www.gracenote.com for the WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED This device complies with Part 15 of the
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR Canada. Operation is subject to the
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, following two conditions:
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY (1) This device may not cause harmful
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE interference, and
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY (2) this device must accept any
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT interference received, including
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT interference that may cause undesired
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE operation.
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
WARNING
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT Changes or modifications not
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO expressively approved by the party
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER responsible for compliance could
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE void the user's authority to operate the
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE certification number only signifies that
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE Industry Canada technical specifications
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR were met.
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT The antenna used for this transmitter must
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY not be co-located or operating in
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES conjunction with any other antenna or
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO transmitter.
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
378

Index
4 Audible Warnings and Indicators.............86

Automatic Transmission Warning
4WD Chime..................................................................86
See: Four-Wheel Drive.....................................140 Engine On Warning Chime...............................86
Headlamps On Warning Chime.....................86
A Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................86
Keyless Warning Alert .......................................86
A/C Parking Brake On Warning Chime.................86
See: Climate Control........................................100 Audio Control...................................................67
About This Manual...........................................7 Audio System................................................286
ABS General Information.........................................286
See: Brakes............................................................145 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
ABS driving hints SYNC/Satellite Radio..............................291
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Brakes................................................................145 SYNC.............................................................289
Accessories....................................................340 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
Exterior Style.......................................................340 CD...................................................................287
Interior Style........................................................340 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium
Lifestyle.................................................................340 AM/FM/CD..................................................293
Peace of Mind.....................................................340 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/
Accessories FM/CD...........................................................295
See: Replacement Parts Autolamps.........................................................73
Recommendation.............................................11 Windshield Wiper Activated
Active Park Assist.........................................153 Headlamps.........................................................74
Automatic Steering into Parking Automatic Climate Control.......................101
Space.................................................................154 Temperature Control.........................................102
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature..........155 Automatic Transmission............................137
Troubleshooting the System..........................156 Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................138
Using Active Park Assist...................................154 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................225 Snow..................................................................139
Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................227 SelectShift Automatic™
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................225 Transmission....................................................137
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................67 Understanding the Positions of Your
Airbag Disposal...............................................43 Automatic Transmission.............................137
Air Conditioning Automatic Transmission Fluid
See: Climate Control........................................100 Check.............................................................222
Air Filter Autowipers........................................................70
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............233 Auxiliary Power Points................................120
Alarm 110 Volt AC Power Point...................................120
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................66 12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................120
Ambient Lighting............................................76 Locations...............................................................120
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................66
Arming the Alarm................................................66
Disarming the Alarm...........................................66
B
Appendices....................................................363 Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery......................223
379

Index
Blind Spot Information System...............161 Changing a Road Wheel...........................262

Switching the System Off and On...............163 Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
System Errors.......................................................163 Information.....................................................262
Using the System................................................161 Tire Change Procedure....................................263
Bonnet Lock Changing the 12V Battery.........................223
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........213 Changing the Engine Air Filter.................233
Booster Seats..................................................22 1.6L and 2.0L EcoBoost Engines..................233
Types of Booster Seats......................................23 2.5L Engine...........................................................234
Brake Fluid Check........................................222 Changing the Wiper Blades.....................224
Brakes...............................................................145 Front Wiper Blades............................................224
General Information..........................................145 Rear Wiper Blade...............................................225
Breaking-In......................................................187 Checking MyKey System Status...............52
Bulb Specification Chart............................231 Checking the Wiper Blades......................224
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
C Maintenance.................................................33
Child Restraint Positioning.........................24
Cabin Air Filter...............................................106 Child Safety.......................................................15
California Proposition 65..............................11 General Information.............................................15
Capacities and Specifications - 1.6L Child Safety Locks..........................................25
EcoBoost™..................................................275 Left-Hand Side......................................................26
Specifications......................................................275 Right-Hand Side...................................................26
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L Cleaning Leather Seats.............................239
EcoBoost™.................................................278 Cleaning Products.......................................235
Specifications......................................................279 Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................239
Capacities and Specifications - Cleaning the Engine....................................237
2.5L.................................................................282 Cleaning the Exterior..................................235
Specifications.....................................................283 Exterior Chrome Parts......................................236
Capacities and Specifications...............268 Exterior Plastic Parts........................................236
Car Wash Stripes or Graphics............................................236
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................235 Underbody...........................................................236
Center Console..............................................122 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Changing a Bulb...........................................227 Instrument Cluster Lens........................238
Lamp Assembly Condensation.....................227 Cleaning the Interior...................................238
Replacing Fog, Park and Turn Signal Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Bulbs..................................................................229 Blades............................................................237
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs...........................228 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................50
Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs...................229 Climate Control............................................100
Replacing High-Mount Brake Lamp Coolant Check
Bulb.....................................................................231 See: Engine Coolant Check.............................219
Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulb............231 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........42
Replacing Reverse Lamp Assembly...........230 Creating a MyKey...........................................50
Replacing Side Marker Bulbs........................229 Programming/Changing Configurable
Replacing Tail, Brake and Turn Signal Settings...............................................................50
Bulbs.................................................................230
Changing a Fuse.............................................211
Fuses.........................................................................211
380

Index
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................163 Emission Control System..........................134

False Alerts...........................................................166 On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................135
Switching the System Off and On...............166 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
System Errors.......................................................166 (I/M) Testing....................................................135
System Lights, Messages and Audible End User License Agreement.................363
Alerts..................................................................165 VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
System Limitations............................................165 AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................363
Using the System................................................163 Engine Block Heater.....................................127
Cruise Control.................................................68 Using the Engine Block Heater......................128
Principle of Operation......................................160 Engine Coolant Check................................219
Cruise control Adding Engine Coolant....................................220
See: Using Cruise Control...............................160 Checking the Engine Coolant.........................219
Customer Assistance..................................195 Recycled Engine Coolant................................220
Severe Climates.................................................220
D What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling...............................................................221
Data Recording..................................................9 Engine Immobilizer
Event Data Recording...........................................9 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................65
Service Data Recording........................................9 Engine Oil Check...........................................218
Daytime Running Lamps.............................75 Adding Engine Oil...............................................218
Type 1 - Conventional Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L
(Non-Configurable)........................................75 EcoBoost™..................................................218
Type 2 - Configurable..........................................75 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost™/
Digital Radio..................................................296 2.5L..................................................................218
HD Radio Reception and Station Engine Specifications - 1.6L
Troubleshooting............................................297 EcoBoost™.................................................268
Direction Indicators........................................76 Drivebelt Routing...............................................268
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................36 Engine Specifications - 2.0L
Children and Airbags..........................................36 EcoBoost™.................................................268
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Drivebelt Routing...............................................269
Adjustment........................................................36 Engine Specifications - 2.5L....................269
Driver Knee Airbag.........................................40 Drivebelt Routing...............................................270
Driving Aids......................................................161 Environment......................................................14
Driving Hints....................................................187 Essential Towing Checks............................181
Driving Through Water...............................188 Before Towing a Trailer.....................................183
DRL Hitches.....................................................................181
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................75 Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).........................................184
E Safety Chains.......................................................182
Trailer Brakes........................................................182
Eco Mode........................................................166 Trailer Lamps.......................................................183
Resetting Eco Mode...........................................167 When Towing a Trailer......................................183
Type 1.......................................................................167 Event Data Recording
Type 2 and 3..........................................................167 See: Data Recording..............................................9
Economical Driving......................................187 Export Unique Options..................................13
381

Index
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................342

EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (CANADA
G
ONLY)................................................................343 Garage Door Opener
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S. See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............115
Only)..................................................................342 Gauges...............................................................82
Exterior Mirrors................................................78 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............83
Blind Spot Monitor...............................................79 Fuel Gauge..............................................................83
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................79 Information Display.............................................82
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................79 General Information on Radio
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors...........................79 Frequencies...................................................44
Memory Mirrors.....................................................79 Intelligent Access.................................................44
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................78 General Maintenance Information.......344
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................346
F Owner Checks and Services..........................345
Protecting Your Investment...........................344
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................28 Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................344
How to Extract Safety Belts in the Rear Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Outboard Positions........................................30 Dealership?.....................................................344
Safety Belt Extension Assembly....................30 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................29 Canada..........................................................198
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........28 Getting the Services You Need...............195
Floor Mats.......................................................188 Away From Home...............................................195
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................75
Ford Credit..........................................................11
H
(U.S. Only).................................................................11 Handbrake
Four-Wheel Drive.........................................140 See: Parking Brake.............................................146
Principle of Operation......................................140 Hazard Warning Flashers...........................191
Front Fog Lamps.............................................75 Headlamp Adjusting
Front Parking Aid..........................................152 See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................225
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................153 Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................74
Front Passenger Sensing System.............37 Headlamp Removal
Fuel and Refueling.......................................129 See: Removing a Headlamp...........................227
Fuel Consumption........................................133 Head Restraints.............................................107
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................134 Adjusting the Head Restraint........................108
Filling the Tank.....................................................133 Heated Seats...................................................113
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................130 Heated Steering Wheel...............................69
Fuel Filter.........................................................222 Heated Windows and Mirrors..................105
Fuel Quality....................................................130 Heated Exterior Mirror......................................105
Choosing the Right Fuel..................................130 Heated Rear Window........................................105
Fuel Shutoff.....................................................191 Heating
Fuses................................................................202 See: Climate Control........................................100
Fuse Specification Chart..........................202 Hill Start Assist..............................................146
Luggage Compartment Fuse Panel...........208 Switching the System On and Off................147
Passenger Compartment Fuse Using Hill Start Assist.......................................146
Panel.................................................................205
Power Distribution Box....................................202
Pre-Fuse Box.......................................................202
382

Index
Hints on Controlling the Interior Information Messages.................................90

Climate..........................................................102 Airbag........................................................................91
Cooling the Interior Quickly............................104 Alarm.........................................................................91
General Hints.......................................................102 Automatic Engine Shutdown...........................91
Heating the Interior Quickly............................103 Battery and Charging System.........................92
Maximum Cooling Performance in Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel Alert System......................................................92
and Footwell Positions...............................105 Doors.........................................................................93
Recommended Settings for Cooling .........104 Engine.......................................................................93
Recommended Settings for Heating..........103 Hill Start Assist.....................................................94
Side Window Defogging in Cold Keyless Vehicle.....................................................94
Weather............................................................105 Lighting....................................................................95
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods Maintenance..........................................................95
during Extreme High Ambient Message indicator...............................................90
Temperatures.................................................104 MyKey.......................................................................95
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Park Aid...................................................................96
Brakes............................................................145 Park Brake...............................................................96
Hood Lock Power Steering......................................................97
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........213 Starting System ...................................................97
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................99
I Traction Control...................................................99
Trailer........................................................................99
Ignition Switch...............................................123 Transmission and Four-Wheel Drive.............97
In California (U.S. Only).............................196 Installing Child Restraints............................16
Information Display Control......................69 Child Seats...............................................................16
Information Displays.....................................87 Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................17
General Information............................................87 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................19
Using Tether Straps..............................................21
Instrument Cluster.........................................82
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................74
Interior Lamps.................................................76
Front Interior Lamp .............................................76
Rear Interior Lamp...............................................76
Interior Mirror...................................................80
Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................80
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................192
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................192
Jump Starting.......................................................193
Preparing Your Vehicle......................................192
Removing the Jumper Cables........................193
383

Index
K Manual Climate Control............................100

Manual Liftgate..............................................59
Keyless Entry....................................................62 Closing the Liftgate.............................................59
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY Opening the Liftgate...........................................59
KEYPAD...............................................................62 Manual Seats.................................................109
Keyless Starting.............................................123 Adjusting the Height of the Driver
Ignition Modes.....................................................124 Seat......................................................................110
Keys and Remote Controls.........................44 Moving the Seat Backward and
Principle of Operation........................................44 Forward.............................................................109
Recline Adjustment............................................110
L Media Hub.......................................................301
Memory Function...........................................112
Lighting Control...............................................73 Saving a PreSet Position...................................112
Headlamp Flasher................................................73 Message Center
High Beams.............................................................73 See: Information Displays.................................87
Lighting...............................................................73 Mirrors
Load Carriers See: Heated Windows and Mirrors..............105
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers..............170 See: Windows and Mirrors.................................77
Load Carrying.................................................169 Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Load Limit.........................................................171 Moonroof..........................................................80
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Bounce-Back..........................................................81
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Opening and Closing the Moonroof...............81
Vehicles..............................................................177 Opening and Closing the Sunscreen.............81
Vehicle Loading - with and without a Venting the Moonroof.........................................81
Trailer...................................................................171 Motorcraft Parts - 1.6L
Locking and Unlocking.................................55 EcoBoost™.................................................270
Activating Intelligent Access ..........................56 Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L
Autolock...................................................................57 EcoBoost™...................................................271
Battery Saver.........................................................58 Motorcraft Parts - 2.5L...............................272
Illuminated Entry..................................................58 MyKey Troubleshooting...............................53
Illuminated Exit.....................................................58 MyKey™.............................................................49
Mechanical Key.....................................................56 Principle of Operation........................................49
Opening a Rear Door from Inside..................56
Power Door Locks................................................55
Remote Control....................................................55
N
Smart Unlocks For Integrated Keyhead Normal Scheduled Maintenance...........347
Transmitter.........................................................57 Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™.........................347
Smart Unlocks For Intelligent Access Keys Normal Maintenance Intervals....................348
................................................................................57
Locks...................................................................55 O
Luggage Covers.............................................169
Lug Nuts Oil Check
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................262 See: Engine Oil Check.......................................218
Opening and Closing the Hood...............213
M Closing the Hood................................................214
Opening the Hood..............................................213
Maintenance...................................................213
General Information...........................................213
384

Index
Ordering Additional Owner's Rear Under Floor Storage..........................169

Literature......................................................199 Adjustable Load Floor......................................169
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........200 Cargo Management System..........................169
Overhead Console........................................122 Rear View Camera........................................157
Using the Rear View Camera System..........157
P Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................157
Parking Aids.....................................................151 Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........72
Principle of Operation........................................151 Rear Window Washer..........................................72
Parking Brake.................................................146 Rear Window Wiper.............................................72
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................65 Recommended Towing Weights.............179
SecuriLock®...........................................................65 Refueling...........................................................131
PATS Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System................132
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................65 Remote Control..............................................45
Perchlorate.........................................................11 Car Finder................................................................47
Personal Safety System™..........................34 Integrated Keyhead Transmitters .................45
How Does the Personal Safety System Intelligent Access Key.........................................45
Work?..................................................................34 Remote Start .........................................................47
Post-Crash Alert System...........................194 Replacing the Battery.........................................46
Power Door Locks Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................47
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................55 Remote Start.................................................106
Power Liftgate................................................60 Automatic Settings...........................................106
Hands-Free Feature............................................62 Heated and Cooled Devices...........................106
Obstacle Detection.............................................62 Last Settings........................................................106
Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................60 Removing a Headlamp..............................227
Setting the Liftgate Open Height....................61 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............239
Stopping the Liftgate Movement....................61 Replacement Parts
Power Seats....................................................110 Recommendation.........................................11
Power Lumbar.......................................................112 Collision Repairs.....................................................11
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................222 Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Power Windows...............................................77 Repairs...................................................................11
Accessory Delay....................................................78 Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Bounce-Back..........................................................77 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
One-Touch Down..................................................77 Control............................................................48
One-Touch Up........................................................77 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Window Lock..........................................................77 Only).............................................................200
Protecting the Environment........................14 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only).............................................................200
R
Rear Parking Aid.............................................151
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................152
Rear Seat Armrest.........................................114
Rear Seats........................................................113
Folding the Seatback.........................................113
Recline Adjustment............................................113
Unfolding the Seatback....................................113
385

Index
Roadside Assistance..................................190 Special Notices................................................12

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
Assistance........................................................190 Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Utility Type Vehicles........................................12
Assistance Program Coverage..................191 On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II).......................12
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Special Instructions..............................................12
Assistance.........................................................191 Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance............13
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow............12
Roadside Assistance...................................190 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Maintenance..............................................350
Roadside Assistance...................................190 Exceptions.............................................................351
Roadside Emergencies..............................190 Speed Control
Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................170 See: Cruise Control............................................160
Adjusting the Crossbar.....................................170 Stability Control............................................149
Running-In Principle of Operation.......................................149
See: Breaking-In..................................................187 Starter Switch
Running Out of Fuel....................................130 See: Ignition Switch............................................123
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Starting a Gasoline Engine........................124
Container...........................................................131 Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................125
Filling a Portable Fuel Container....................131 Failure to Start.....................................................125
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................127
S Important Ventilating Information...............127
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Safety Canopy™............................................40 Moving................................................................126
Safety Precautions.......................................129 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Satellite Radio..............................................298 Stationary.........................................................126
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................124
(ESN)................................................................299 Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................124
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............299 Starting and Stopping the Engine..........123
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service.................299 General Information...........................................123
Troubleshooting................................................300 Steering............................................................167
Scheduled Maintenance Record............352 Electric Power Steering.....................................167
Scheduled Maintenance..........................344 Steering Wheel................................................67
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.......................31 Storage Compartments.............................122
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................32 Sunroof
Belt-Minder™........................................................32 See: Moonroof......................................................80
Seatbelts............................................................27 Sun Visors.........................................................80
Principle of Operation.........................................27 Illuminated Vanity Mirror..................................80
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Supplementary Restraints System.........35
Chime................................................................31 Principle of Operation.........................................35
Conditions of operation......................................31 Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Seats..................................................................107 SYNC™ Applications and Services.......318
Security..............................................................65 911 Assist................................................................318
Side Airbags.....................................................39 SYNC Mobile Apps............................................320
Sitting in the Correct Position..................107 SYNC™...........................................................302
Snow Chains General Information.........................................302
See: Using Snow Chains.................................258 SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................332
386

Index
T Trip Computer.................................................90
All Value..................................................................90
Tailgate Average Fuel..........................................................90
See: Manual Liftgate...........................................59 Digital Speedo......................................................90
See: Power Liftgate.............................................60 Distance to E.........................................................90
Technical Specifications Instantaneous Fuel.............................................90
See: Capacities and Specifications............268 Resetting the Trip Computer...........................90
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Trip Odometer......................................................90
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................197 Trip Timer................................................................90
Tire Care..........................................................245
Glossary of Tire Terminology........................246
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
U
Grading.............................................................245 Under Hood Overview - 1.6L
Information Contained on the Tire EcoBoost™..................................................215
Sidewall............................................................247 Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
Temperature A B C............................................246 EcoBoost™..................................................216
Traction AA A B C...............................................245 Under Hood Overview - 2.5L.....................217
Treadwear.............................................................245 Universal Garage Door Opener................115
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........259 HomeLink Wireless Control System.............115
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure USB Port..........................................................301
Monitoring System.......................................260 Using Cruise Control...................................160
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Switching Cruise Control Off.........................160
Monitoring System ......................................260 Switching Cruise Control On..........................160
Tires Using Four-Wheel Drive............................140
See: Wheels and Tires......................................242 Driving in Special Conditions With
Towing a Trailer..............................................178 Four-Wheel Drive..........................................140
Load Placement..................................................178 Using MyKey With Remote Start
Towing Points................................................184 Systems..........................................................53
Installing the Recovery Hook.........................184 Using Snow Chains.....................................258
Recovery Hook Location..................................184 Using Stability Control...............................150
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels............184 AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
Towing the Vehicle on Four (RSC®)..............................................................150
Wheels...........................................................185 Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Emergency Towing.............................................185 Player.............................................................323
Recreational Towing.........................................186 Accessing Your USB Song Library................327
Towing...............................................................178 Bluetooth Devices and System
Traction Control............................................148 Settings............................................................329
Principle of Operation.......................................148 Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
Trailer Sway Control.....................................179 USB Port...........................................................323
Transmission Code Designation.............274 Media Menu Features.......................................327
Transmission...................................................137 Media Voice Commands.................................324
Transmission USB 2......................................................................329
See: Transmission...............................................137 Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........330
Transporting the Vehicle...........................185
387

Index
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........306

Accessing Features through the Phone
W
Menu....................................................................311 Warning Lamps and Indicators................84
Accessing Your Phone Settings.....................314 Airbag - Front........................................................84
Bluetooth Devices..............................................315 Anti-Lock Braking System................................84
Making Calls........................................................309 Battery.....................................................................84
Pairing a Phone for the First Time..............306 Blind Spot Monitor..............................................84
Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................307 Brake System........................................................84
Phone Options during an Active Call..........310 Cruise Control........................................................84
Phone Voice Commands...............................308 Direction Indicator...............................................84
Receiving Calls....................................................310 Engine Oil................................................................85
System Settings..................................................316 Fasten Safety Belt...............................................85
Text Messaging....................................................312 Fog Lamps - Front...............................................85
Using Traction Control...............................148 High Beam..............................................................85
Switching the System Off...............................148 Information.............................................................85
System Indicator Lights and Low Fuel Level.......................................................85
Messages..........................................................148 Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................85
Using a Switch.....................................................148 Parking Lamps......................................................85
Using the Information Display Service Engine Soon...........................................85
Controls.............................................................148 Traction and Stability Control.........................86
Using Voice Recognition...........................304 Traction and Stability Control Off.................86
Initiating a Voice Session...............................304 Washer Fluid Check.....................................222
System Interaction and Feedback..............305 Washers
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................235
Program (Canada Only).........................198 See: Wipers and Washers.................................70
Waxing.............................................................236
V Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................262
Vehicle Care...................................................235 Wheels and Tires.........................................242
General Information.........................................235 General Information..........................................242
Vehicle Certification Label........................274 Technical Specifications.................................266
Vehicle Identification Number................273 Windows and Mirrors.....................................77
Vehicle Storage............................................240 Windshield Washers.......................................71
Battery....................................................................241 Windshield Wipers.........................................70
Body.......................................................................240 Intermittent Wipe.................................................70
Brakes......................................................................241 Speed Dependent Wipers................................70
Cooling system....................................................241 Wiper Blades
Engine....................................................................240 See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................224
Fuel system...........................................................241 Wipers and Washers.....................................70
General..................................................................240 Wrecker Towing
Miscellaneous......................................................241 See: Transporting the Vehicle........................185
Removing Vehicle From Storage...................241
Tires.........................................................................241
Ventilation
See: Climate Control........................................100
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number.............273
Voice Control...................................................68
388

Escape 2016 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Escape 2016 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Escape 2016 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016 ESCAPE Owner’s Manual

2016 ESCAPE Owner’s Manual

All rights reserved.

Introduction Driver and Passenger Airbags...................36

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Information Display Control......................69 Automatic Climate Control.......................101

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Running Out of Fuel....................................130 Cross Traffic Alert.........................................163

Traction Control Driving Hints

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Vehicle Care

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications - 2.5L....282 Appendices

Extended Service Plan

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Note: This manual describes product

manual may show features as used in Anti-lock braking system

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Brake system Front airbag

Cabin air filter Front fog lamps

Check fuel cap Fuel pump reset

Child safety door lock or unlock Fuse compartment

Child seat lower anchor Hazard warning flashers

Child seat tether anchor Heated rear window

Cruise control Heated windshield

Do not open when hot Interior luggage compartment

Engine air filter Jack

Engine coolant Keep out of reach of children

Engine coolant temperature Lighting control

Engine oil Low tire pressure warning

Explosive gas Maintain correct fluid level

Fan warning Note operating instructions

Fasten seatbelt Panic alarm

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Parking aid facilities may access or share among them

Event Data Recording

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 For your convenience we offer a number

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

development we validate these parts On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)

Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Using Your Vehicle as an EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Child Child size, height, weight, or age Recommended restraint

Use a child safety seat

• You are required by law to properly use

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Second Printing

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and

5. To put the retractor in the automatic

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper